EnP Draft Reviewer 2012

Module 1. INTRODUCTION TO P LANNING ......................................................................................
1
World Planning History ....................................................................................................................3
History of planning in the Philippines ...............................................................................................18
Theories in Urban and Regional Planning .......................................................................................24
Basic Elements of the City .............................................................................................................28
Introduction to Environment al Planning ...........................................................................................29
The Practice of Environmental Planning in the Philippines ................................................................34
Module 2. PHYSICAL PLA NNING ...................................................................................................39
Land Use Planning ........................................................................................................................41
Zoning ..........................................................................................................................................42
Mapping........................................................................................................................................43
Site: Concepts And Principles ........................................................................................................45
Ecological Balance ........................................................................................................................46
Module 3. ECONOMIC PLA NNING .................................................................................................49
Commerce ....................................................................................................................................51
Industry.........................................................................................................................................58
Tourism ........................................................................................................................................59
Module 4. SOCIAL PLANNING .......................................................................................................63
Education......................................................................................................................................65
Housing ........................................................................................................................................66
Healt h...........................................................................................................................................67
Social Welfare Services .................................................................................................................75
Protective Servic es ........................................................................................................................77
Sports and Recreation ...................................................................................................................78
Module 5. PLANNING LAW AND ADMINIS TRA TION.......................................................................83
PD 1308 “Law Regulating the Environmental Planning Profession in the Philippines ”.........................85
Code of Ethics for Environmental Planners in the Philippines ...........................................................91
Planning Organizations ..................................................................................................................93
The Philippine Planning System and Plan Implementation ............................................................. 108
Rationalized Local Planning System ............................................................................................. 118
Module 6. SPECIAL PLA NNING S TUDIES .................................................................................... 129
PRACTICE BOARD E XAM QUESTIONS ............................................................................................a
Practice Questions - Set A ...............................................................................................................b
Practice Questions – Set B...............................................................................................................g
Practice Questions - Set C ...............................................................................................................s
Practice questions – Set D .............................................................................................................bb
Practice Questions – Set E.............................................................................................................ee
Practice Questions – Set F............................................................................................................... ii
REVIEWER FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING PAGE | i

P a g e | ii REVIEWER FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING
Module 1.
INTRODUCTION TO
PLANNING
REVIEWER FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING PAGE | 1

P a g e |2 REVIEWER FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING
WORLD PLANNING HISTORY
1791 – L’Enfant’s Plan for Washington

“A plan to serve as the framework for the capital city of the new nation”
The plan was intended as:
 The model for American City Planning
 A symbol of governmental power
The plan specified that most streets would be laid out in a grid. To form the grid, some streets would
travel in an east-west direction, while others would travel in a north -south direction. Diagonal avenues
later named after the states of the union crossed the grid. The diagonal avenues intersected with the
north-south and east-west streets at circles and rectangular plazas that would later honor not able
Americans and provide open space.
L'Enfant laid out a 400 feet (122 m)-wide garden-lined "grand avenue", which he ex pected t o travel for
about 1 mile (1.6 km) along an east-west axis in the center of an area that would lat er become
theNational Mall. He als o laid out a narrower avenue (Pennsylvania A venue) which would connect the
Congress house with the President 's house. In time, Pennsylvania A venue developed into the capital
city's present "grand avenue".

L'Enfant's plan additionally laid out a system of canals (later designated as the Washington City Canal)
that would pass the Congress house and the President's house. One branch of the canal would empty
into the Potomac River south of the "President's house" at the mouth of Tiber Creek, which would be
channelized and straightened.
L'Enfant's temperament and his insistence that his city design be realized as a whole, brought him into
conflict with the Commissioners, who wanted to direct the limited funds avai lable into construction of the
federal buildings. In this, they had the support of Thomas Jefferson.
During a contentious period in February 1792, Andrew Ellicott, who had been conducting the original
boundary survey of the future District of Columbia and t he survey of the federal city under the direction of
the Commissioners, informed the Commissioners that L'Enfant had not been able to have the city plan
engraved and had refused to provide him with the original plan (of which L'Enfant had prepared several
versions). Ellicott, with the aid of his brother, Benjamin Ellicott, then revised the plan, despite L'Enfant 's
protests. Shortly thereaft er, Washington dismissed L'Enfant. After L'Enfant departed, Andrew Ellicott
continued the city survey in accordance with the revised plan, several versions of which were engraved,
published and distribut ed. As a result, Ellicott's revisions subsequently became the basis for the capital
city's development.
1853-1870 – Baron Haussmann and the

Modernization of Paris
Purposes
 Economic: Promote industrialization by enabling goods

and services to be transported efficiently
 Aesthetic: Impose a measure of unifying order and

opening up space to allow light to penetrate Paris
 Military: Eliminate the threats of prolet ariats rising
 Sanitary: Improve the state of health
Haussmann's Renovation of Paris, or the Haussmann Plan,

was a modernization program of Paris commissioned
by Napoléon III and led by the Seine prefect, Baron Georges-
Eugène Haussmann, between 1853 and 1870. Though work
continued until the end of the 19t h century, well after
the Second Empire's demise in 1870, it is often referred to as
the "Second Empire reforms".
The project encompassed all as pects of urban planning, both in

the centre of Paris and in the surrounding districts: streets and
boulevards, regulations imposed on facades of buildings, public
parks, sewers and water works, city facilities, and public
monuments. The planning was influenced by many factors, not
the least of which was the city's history of street revolutions
Between the Revolution of 1789 and Haussmann's renovation of Paris in the 1860s, ideals changed from
those of a politically motivated city to those of an economically and socially centered city. Modern
technology such as railroads and gas lamps were conveniences which the rising bourgeoisie could enjoy

in their leisurely lifestyle. New spaces that were created during the renovation encouraged the
bourgeoisie to flaunt their new wealth, creating a booming economy. All of these examples of the
changes occurring in Paris during this period can be seen in representations of the city. There are two
views of B aron Haussmann: One depicts him as the man who destroyed Old Paris, and t he other as the
man who created New Paris.
Georges -Eugène Haussmann was hired by Napoleon III on 22 June 1852 to "modernize" Paris. He hoped
in hiring Haussmann that Paris could b e moulded int o a city with safer streets, better housing, more
sanitary, hospit able, shopper-friendly communities, better traffic flow, and, last but not least, streets too
broad for rebels to build barricades across them and where coherent battalions and artillery could
[5]
circulate easily if need be. He created broad avenues linked to t he main train-stations so army troops
from the provinces could be operative in a short amount of time (for example, the boulevard de
Strasbourgnear Gare de l'Est and Gare du Nord). This work achieved during the Second Empire is one of
the causes of the quick repression of the 1871 Paris Commune: Sinc e the 1848 revolution, Adolphe
Thiers had become obsessed wit h crushing out the next foreseeable Parisian rebellion. Thus, he planned
to leave the city and retreat, in order to better take it back with more military forces.
Haussmann's design of streets and avenues, combined with the new importanc e given to trains, made
this plan more than successful, and A dolphe Thiers easily crushed the Communards. Haussmann
accomplished much of this by tearing up many of the old, twisting streets and rundown apartment houses,
and replacing t hem with the wide, tree -lined boulevards and expansive gardens for whic h Paris is famous
today. Other elements of Haussman's plan included uniform building heights, grand boulevards, and
anchoring elements including the Arc de Triomphe and the Grand Opera House.
Haussmann's plan for P aris inspired some of the most important architectural movements including
the City Beautiful Movement in the United States. In fact, renowned American architect Daniel
Burnham borrowed liberally from Haussmann's plan and even incorporated the diagonal st reet designs in
his 1909 Plan of Chicago. Cities like London and Moscow also have Haussmann influences in their city
plans.
Historian Shelley Ric e, in her book Parisian Views writes that "most Parisians during [the first half of the
nineteenth century] perceived [the streets] as dirty, crowded, and unhealthy . . . Covered with mud and
makeshift shanties, damp and fetid, filled with the signs of poverty as well as the signs of garbage and
waste left there by the inadequate and faulty sewer system . . ." (p. 9). For these people, Haussmann was
performing a much needed service to the city and to France.

1859 – Illedons Cerda and his Plan for the Extension of Barcelona
Ildefons Cerdà i Sunyer was the progressive Catalan Spanish urban planner who designed the 19th-
century "extension" of Barcelona called the Eixample. Born at Centelles, Catalonia on December 23.
1815, he originally trained as a civil engineer. When the government of the time finally gave in to public
pressure and allowed Barcelona's city walls to be torn down, he realiz ed the need to plan the city's
expansion so that the new extension would become an efficient and livable place, unlike the congested,
epidemic-prone old town within the walls. When he failed to find suitable reference works, he undertook
the task of writing one from scratch while designing what he called the 'Eixample', borrowing a few
technological ideas from his c ontemporaries to creat e a unique, thoroughly modern integrated concept
that was carefully considered rather than whimsically designed.
Purposes
 Freedom of the individual
 Air, sun and natural light in all dwellings
 Equalitarian desire for quality services in all city districts
 Mobility and ease of communication
He continued to create projects and improve existing designs throughout his lifetime, as well as to
develop his theories taking on larger planning scopes (at regional planning level), until the very end. In
the process, he lost all his family's inheritance and he died a heavily indebted near -pauper, never having
been paid for his chief masterpiece, the design of the Barcelona 'Eixample'.
He focus ed on key needs: chiefly, the need for sunlight, natural lighting and ventilation in homes (he was
heavily influenced by the sanitarian movement), the need for greenery in people's surroundings, the need
for effective waste disposal including good sewerage, and the need for seamless movement of people,
goods, energy, and information.

His designs belie a network-oriented approach far ahead of his time. His street lay out and grid plan were
optimized to accommodate pedestrians, carriages, horse-drawn trams, urban railway lines (as yet
unheard-of), gas supply and large-c apacity sewers to prevent frequent floods, without neglecting public
and privat e gardens and other key amenities. The lat est technical innovations were incorporated in his
designs if they could further the cause of better integration, but he also came up with remarkable new
concepts of his own, including a logical system of land readjustment that was essential to the success of
his project, and produced a thorough statistical analysis of working-class conditions at the time, which he
undertook in order to demonstrate the ills of congestion.
1898 – Ebenezer Howard and his Garden City Concept

Purposes:
 Raise health and comfort of all true workers of whatever class
 Find work at higher purc hasing power
 Secure healthi er surroundings and more regular employment
 Secure a new and better employment for professionals
Sir Ebenezer Howard (29 January 1850– May 1, 1928) is known for his public ation Garden Cities of To-
morrow (1898), the description of a utopian city in which people live harmoniously together wit h nature.
The publication resulted in the founding of the garden city movement, that realized several Garden Cities
in Great Britain at the beginning of the t wentieth century. Billerica Garden S uburb, Inc.(1914), was the first
housing in the United States on the Howard plan.
The only publication he wrote in his

life was titled To-Morrow: A
Peaceful Pat h to Real Reform,
which was reprinted in 1902
as Garden Cities of To-morrow.
This book offered a vision of towns
free of slums and enjoying the
benefits of both town (such as
opportunity, amusement and good
wages) and count ry (such as
beauty, fres h air and low rents). He
illustrated the idea with his famous
Three Magnets diagram
(pictured), which addressed the
question 'Where will the people
go?', the choices being 'Town',
'Count ry'or 'Town-Country'.
It proposed the creation of

new suburban towns of limited
size, planned in advance, and
surrounded by a permanent belt of
agricultural land. These Garden
cities were used as the model for
many suburbs. Howard believed
that such Garden Cities were the
perfect blend of city and nat ure.
The towns would be largely
independent, managed by the citizens who had an ec onomic interest in them, and financed by ground

rents on the Georgist model. The land on which they were to be built was to be owned by a group of
trustees and leased to the citizens.
1891 – Daniel Burnham plans the 1893 World’s Columbian Exposition
Print of an aerial view of the exposition
The World's Columbian Exposition (the official shortened name for the World's Fair: Columbian
Exposition,also known as The Chicago World's
Fair) was a World's Fair held in Chicago in 1893 to
celebrate the 400th anniversary of Christopher
Columbus 's arrival in theNew World in 1492.
The Chi cago Columbian Exposition was, in large
part, designed by Daniel B urnham and Frederick Law
Olmsted. It was the prototype of what Burnham and
his colleagues thought a city should be. It was
designed to follow Beaux Arts principles of design,
namely French neoclassical arc hitecture principles
based on symmetry, balanc e, and splendor.
The exposition covered more than 600 acres

2
(2.4 km ), featuring nearly 200 new (but purposely
temporary) buildings of predominately neoclassical
architecture, canals and lagoons, and people and
cultures from around the world. More than 27 million
people attended the exposition during its six-month
run. Its scale and grandeur far exceeded the
other world fairs, and it became a symbol of the
emerging American Exceptionalism, much in the
same way that the Great Exhibition became a symbol
of the Victorian era United Kingdom.
Most of the buildings were based on classical

architecture. The area at the Court of Honor was
known as The White City. The buildings were made
of a white stucco, which, in comparison to the tenements of Chicago, seemed illuminat ed. It was also
called the White City because of the extensi ve use of street lights, which made the boulevards and
buildings usable at night.

1890s-1910s – City Beautiful Movement
 Improving the city through beautification
 Sanitation
 Aesthetics
 Civic Improvements
 Building Design
 Civic Spirit
The White City is largely accredited for ushering in the City Beautiful movement and planting the seeds of
modern city planning. The highly integrated design of the landscapes, promenades, and structures
provided a vision of what is possible when planners, landscape architects, and architects work together
on a comprehensive design scheme. The Whit e City inspired cities to focus on t he beautification of the
components of the city in which municipal government had control; streets, municipal art, public buildings
and public spaces. The designs of the City Beautiful Movement (closely tied with the municipal art
movement) are identifiable by their classical architecture, plan symmetry, picturesque views, axial plans,
as well as their magnificent scale. Where the municipal art movement focused on beautifying one feature
in a City, the City Beautiful movement began t o make improvements on the scale of the district. The
White City of the World's Colombian Exposition inspired the Merchant's Club of Chicago to commission
Daniel Burnham to create the Plan of Chicago in 1909, which became the first modern comprehensive
city plan in America.
Daniel Burnham:
“Mak e no little plans. They have no magic and probably themselves will not be realized. Mak e big
plans; aim high in hope and work , remembering that a noble, logic al diagram once recorded will never
die, but long after we are gone will be a living thing, asserting itself with ever-growing insistenc y.
Remember that our sons and grandsons are going to do things that would stagger us. Let your
watchword be order and your beacon beauty. Think big.”
1909 – Daniel Burnham’s Plan of Chicago

Purposes:
 Rationalize development for the fut ure
 Proposed the moral up-building and physical beautification of Chicago
 Better living conditions
 Reclaiming the lakefront for the public
 Increase the park areas and public playgrounds
 Establish a scientific development of the arteries between different sections of the city
The Burnham Plan is a popular name for the 1909 Plan of Chicago, co-authored by Daniel
Burnham and Edward H. Bennett. It recommended an integrated series of projects including new and
widened streets, parks, new railroad and harbor facilities, and civic buildings. Though only portions of the
plan were realized, the document reshaped Chicago's cent ral area and was an import ant influence on the
new field of city planning.

The plan included six major aspects:
Improvement of the lakefront. Foremost among the plan's goals was reclaiming the lakefront for the
public. “The Lakefront by right belongs to the p eople," wrote Burnham. "Not a foot of its shores should be
appropriated to the exclusion of t he people.” The plan recommended expanding the parks along the Lake
Michigan shoreline with landfill, which was done in the early 20th cent ury. Of the city's 29 mi les (47 km) of
lakefront, all but four miles (six kilometers) are today public parkland. The plan also provided for extensive
lakefront harbor facilities, which became unnecessary with the city's development of facilities in the Lake
Calumet region.
A regional highway system. The plan considered Chicago as the center of a region extending 75 miles
(120 km) from the city center. At the dawn of the aut omobile age, the plan diagrammed both radial and
circumferential highways for the region. However, the agencies who built and improved highways in the
1910s and 1920s do not appear to have been guided to build along the specific routes recommended in
the plan.
Improvement of railway terminals. The plan drew on technical studies previously done by others,
including a plan for competing railroads to pool usage of tracks for greater efficiency in freight handling. In
addition, the plan detailed the consolidation of Chicago's six intercity railroad passenger terminals into
new complexes west of the Loop and south of Roosevelt Road. This, in turn, would allow the expansion
of the business district southward. A new Chicago Union Station was finished in 1925, but no other
stations were consolidated or relocated. In 1929, the South Branch of the Chicago River was
rechanneled, bet ween Polk and 18th Streets, to untangle railroad approaches as recommended by the
plan.
New outer parks. The movement to purchas e and preserve the nat ural areas that became the Cook
County Forest Preserves was well under way as the plan was being written. The plan includes those
proposals and also calls for the expansion of the city's park and boulevard system, which had been first
established in the 1870s.
Systematic arrangement of streets. New wider arterials were prescribed to relieve traffic congestion in
the fast-growing city, including a net work of new diagonal streets. One of thes e was constructed, the
extension of Ogden A venue; there are several other diagonal streets throughout the city. The plan's
recommendations were followed, and the city widened Roosevelt Road and Michigan A venue, and
created Wacker Drive and Congress Parkway. In addition, some 108 miles (174 km) of arterial streets
[1]
were widened bet ween 1915 and 1931, spurred by the tremendous growth in aut omobile usage. Writing
in 1908, Burnham saw the automobile as a recreational vehicle that would allow city dwellers to visit the
countryside. He could not foresee how it would overwhelm and transform the city itself.
Civic and cultural centers. The most iconic image of the plan is the new civic center proposed for the
area around Congress and Halsted Streets. However, city officials who preferred t he convenience of a
Loop location never seriously pursued the proposal. At the east end of Congress Street, which would
become the central axis of the reshaped city, Burnham proposed a cultural cent er in Grant
Park consisting of the new Field Museum of Natural History and new homes for the Art Institute of
Chicago and the Crerar Library. This proposal, however, placed Burnham and other civic leaders in
conflict with a state supreme court decision forbidding any new buildings in Grant Park.
Though Burnham died in 1912, Plan of Chicago was promoted by Commercial Club members and
the Chicago Plan Commission they persuaded the mayor to appoint. Co -author Edward H. Bennett, a
graduate of the École des Beaux -Arts, advised various public agencies as they constructed the projects
recommended by the plan, using a d esign vocabulary reminiscent of 19th c entury Paris. MayorWilliam
Hale Thompson, elected in 1915, used Plan of Chicago projects to promote his image as a Chicago
booster, and as a rich source of public contracts.
The plan has been criticized for its focus on physical improvements, an attempt to create "Paris on the
Prairie." Burnham's handwritten draft of the plan contained extensive discussion of social needs, but th e
P a g e | 10 REVIEWER FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING

[2]
final publication does not. The plan's list of big infrastructure improvements were badly needed by a
rapidly growing city, at a time when an expanding tax bas e made it possible to undertak e large projects.
Enthusiasm for the B urnham Plan's specific proposals faded with the onset of the Great Depression, but
aspects of the plan continued to guide planners as they expanded parks, built new bridges, and laid out
the city's superhighway net work. Civic leaders still make frequent reference to B urnham's vision for the
city, and to an aphorism posthumously attributed t o him, the oft -quoted exhortation to "mak e no little
plans."
1822-1903 – Frederick Law Olmsted Sr.

 Champion of the City Beautiful Movement
 1893 World Exposition in Chicago
 Mostly famous for the design of:
 Riverside Illinois
 Cent ral Park, NY
 Buffalo, NY park system
 Druid Hills, GA
1870-1957 – Frederick Law Olmsted Jr.

 1899 - Founding member of the American Society of Landscape Architects
 1901 - Member of the McMillan Commission
 1910s-1920s - Founder of the American City Planning Institute

 1910s-1940s - National Park Service advis or
Many features of his suburban plans have had enduring influence:
 Concept of neighborhood-cent ered development
 Differentiation of streets by function
 Importance of common open recreation space
 Need for continuing maintenance and aesthetic oversight
1929 – Radburn, NJ
Radburn is an unincorporated planned community located within Fair Lawn, in Bergen County, New
Jersey, United States.
Radburn was founded in 1929 as "a town for the motor age". Its planners, Clarence Stein and Henry
Wright, and its landscape archit ect Marjorie Sewell Cautley aimed to incorporat e modern planning
principles, whic h were then being introduced into England's Garden Cities, following ideas advocated
by urban planners Ebenezer Howard, Sir Patrick Geddes and Clarence Perry. Perry’s Neighbourhood
unit concept was well-formulat ed by the time Radburn was planned, being informed by Forest Hills
Gardens, Queens, New York (1909-1914), a garden-city development of the Russell Sage Foundation.
[5]
Radburn was explicitly designed to s eparate traffic by mode, with a pedestrian path system that does
not cross any major roads at grade. Radburn introduced the largely residential "superblock" and is
credited with incorporating some of the earliest culs-de-sac in the United States.
Six Principles
 Plan simply, but comprehensively
 Provide ample sites in the right places for community use
 Put factories and ot her industrial buildings where they can be used without wasteful
transportation of people and goods
 Cars must be parked and stored
 Bring private and public land int o relationship
 Arrange for the occupancy of houses

1887-1965 – Le Corbusier
“We must decongest the centers of our cities by increasing their density.”
“We must improve circulation and increase the amount of open space.”
That paradox could be resolved by b uilding high on a small part of land, according to
Corbusier.
It was Le Corbusier's Villa Savoye (1929–1931) that most succinctly summed up his five points of
architecture that he had elucidated in the journal L'Esprit Nouveau and his book Vers une architecture,
which he had been developing throughout the 1920s. First, Le Corbusier lifted the bulk of the structure off
the ground, supporting it by piloti s – reinforced concrete stilts. These pilotis, in providing t he structural
support for the house, allowed him to elucidate his next two points: a free façade, meaning non-
supporting walls that could be designed as the architect wished, and an open floor plan, meaning t hat the
floor space was free to be configured into rooms without concern for supporting walls. The second floor of
the Villa Savoye includes long strips of ribbon windows t hat allow unencumbered views of the large
surrounding yard, and which constitute the fourth point of his system. The fifth point was the roof
garden to compensat e for the green area consumed by the building and replacing it on the roof. A ramp
rising from ground level to t he third floor roof terrace allows for an archit ectural promenade t hrough the
structure. The white tubular railing recalls the industrial " ocean-liner" aesthetic that Le Corbusier much
admired. As if to put an exclamation mark after Le Corbusier's homage to modern industry, the driveway
around the ground floor, with its semicircular path, measures the exact turning radius of a
1927 Citroën automobile.
n the 1930s, Le Corbusier expanded and reformulated his ideas on urbanism, eventually publishing them
in La Ville radieus e (The Radiant City) of 1935. Perhaps the most significant difference between the
Cont emporary City and the Radiant City is that the latter abandons the class -based stratification of the
former; housing is now assigned according to family size, not economic position. Some have read dark
overtones into The Radiant City: from the "astonis hingly beautiful assemblage of buildings" that was
Stockholm, for example, Le Corbusier saw only “frightening chaos and saddening monotony.” He
dreamed of "cleaning and purging" the city, bringing "a calm and powerful architecture"—referring to

steel, plate glass, and reinforced concrete. Though Le Corbusier's designs for Stockholm did not
succeed, later architects took his ideas and partly "destroyed" the city with them.
After World War II, Le Corbusier attempted to realize his urban planning schemes on a small scale by
constructing a series of "unités" (the housing block unit of the Radiant City) around Franc e. The most
famous of thes e was the Unité d'Habitation of Marseilles (1946–1952). In the 1950s, a unique opport unity
to translate the Radiant City on a grand scale pres ented itself in the construction of t he Union
Territ ory Chandigarh, the new capital for the Indian states of Pu njab and Hary ana and the first planned
city in India. Le Corbusier designed many administration buildings including a courthouse, parliament
building and a university. He also designed the general layout of the city dividing it into sectors.

1920-2001 – Ian McHarg
 1969 – “Design with Nature” published
 Introduced ecological planning
o McHarg’s starting point was usually a physiographic section, like that shown in the picture
above. He argued that form must not follow function, but must also respect the natural
environment in which it is placed .” Note the placement of structures in the forested
slopes which made them almost unnoticeable. .”

 Multi-disciplinary suitability analyses
 Pioneered the use of environmental impact statements
 Early champion of map overlays and their value to the planning process

 McHarg built the foundation for GIS
o He pioneered the us e of map overlays to highlight intrinsic natural features, that

commonly included flood zones, wetlands, woody vegetation stands, slopes, drainages,
aquifer recharge zones, areas under cultivation and man-made features. Each asset
could be assigned an arbitrary value, depending on societal input. 

1980s-Today – New Urbanism

 Revival of our lost art of place-making
 Reordering of the built environment into the form of complete cities, towns, villages, and
neighborhoods
 The way communities have been built for centuries around the world
NEW URBANISM promotes the creation and restoration of divers e, walkable, compact, vibrant, mixed-
use communities composed of the same components as conventional development, but assembled in a
more integrated fashion, in the form of complete communities. Thes e contain housing, work places,
shops, entertainment, schools, parks, and civic facilities essential to the daily lives of the residents, all
within easy walking distance of each other. New Urbanism promotes the increased use of trains and light
rail, instead of more highways and roads. Urban living is rapidly becoming the new hip and modern way
to live for people of all ages. Currently, there are over 4,000 New Urbanist projects planned or under
construction in the United States alone, half of which are in historic urban cent ers. THE P RINCIPLES OF
NEW URBANISM
The principles of New Urbanism can be applied increasingly to projects at the full range of scales from a
single building to an entire community.
1. Walkability
-Most things within a 10-minut e walk of home and work

-Pedestrian friendly street design (buildings close to street; porches, windows & doors; tree -lined
streets; on street parking; hidden parking lots; garages in rear lane; narrow, slow speed streets)
-Pedestrian streets free of cars in special cases
2. Connectivity
-Interconnected street grid net work disperses traffic & eases walking
-A hierarchy of narrow streets, boulevards, and alleys
-High quality pedestrian network and public realm makes walking pleasurable
3. Mixed-Use & Diversi ty
-A mix of shops, offices, apartments, and homes on site. Mixed-use within neighborhoods, within
blocks, and within buildings
-Diversity of people - of ages, income levels, cultures, and races
4. Mixed Housing
A range of types, sizes and prices in closer proximity

5. Quality Architecture & Urban De sign
Emphasis on beauty, aesthetics, human comfort, and creating a sense o f place; Special placement of
civic uses and sites within community. Human scale architecture & beautiful surroundings nourish the
human spirit
6. Traditional Neighborhood Structure
-Discernable center and edge

-Public space at center
-Importance of quality public realm; public open space designed as civic art
-Contains a range of uses and densities within 10 -minute walk
-Transect planning: Highest densities at town cent er; progressively less dense towards the edge. The
transect is an analytical system that conceptualizes mutually reinforcing elements, creating a series of
specific natural habitats and/or urban lifestyle settings. The Transect integrates environmental
methodology for habitat assessment with zoning methodology for community design. The
professional boundary between the natural and man-made disappears, enabling environmentalists to
assess the design of the human habitat and the urbanists to support the viability of nature. This
urban-to-rural transect hierarchy has appropriate building and street types for each area along the
continuum.
The Transect
7. Increased Densi ty
-More buildings, residences, shops, and services closer toget her for ease of walking, to enable a more
efficient use of services and resources, and to create a more convenient, enjoyable place to live.
-New Urbanism design principles are applied at the full range of densities from small towns, to large cities
8. Smart Transportation
-A network of high-quality trains connecting cities, towns, and neighborhoods together

-Pedestrian-friendly design that encourages a greater use of bicycles, rollerblades, scooters, and walking
as daily transportation
9. Sustainability
-Minimal environmental impact of development and its operations

-Eco-friendly technologies, respect for ecology and value of natural systems
-Energy efficiency
-Less use of finit e fuels
-More local production

-More walking, less driving
10. Quality of Life
Taken together these add up to a high quality of life well worth living, and create places that enrich, uplift,
and inspire the human spirit.
Capri, Italy
Referenc e: A round the Planning World in 90 Minutes (by Joanne Cassulo, S enior Planner, OEP, and
Sandrine Thibault, Principal Planner, OEP)
Website: www.nh.gov/oep/
HISTORY OF PLANNING IN THE P HILIPPINES
1. Pre-colonial Age
Some scholars believe that the pre-colonial inhabitants of the P hilippines exhibited some degree of
settlement planning [Reed and Arguilla in Oc ampo, 1992]. Old world explorers from the West noted t he
uniformity of the pre-Spanish Filipinos' dwellings. They have further observed that the natives'
communities were eit her near the bodies of water or dispersed around the land they cultivated for
farming.
According to history there existed a kingdom of Moros loc ated along the banks of the Pasig 200 years
prior to the coming of the Spaniards. This group of people which was lat er headed by Sulayman
established the city of Manila and prot ected it with fortifications against the foreign invaders. When the
Spanish armada came, the Moros resisted but were overwhelmed by the power of t he former's forces.
When rebuilding the city after t he ravages of war, the Spanish colonists employed local materials,
technology, and c raftsmen. Some of the known geniuses in their craft were Panday-Pira and "El
Admirante." The former was a cannon -mak er while the latter [a relative of Sulayman] was a master
builder. El A dmirante was commissioned t o undertake the construction of t he walled city of Intramuros
[Shepherd in Ocampo, 1992].
Other groups of people around the archipelago displayed their own distinctive patterns of planning their
settlements. Mountain dwellers in Cordillera believe t hat territory should be institutionalized by the atu or
ward. There were also native folks who resided along bodies of water. The Tagalogs were t aga -ilog [river
dwellers] while the Maranaws were lake dwellers. These groups were perhaps the descendants of the
earliest sea coast communities known as the barangay [also balanghay].

Spanish Regime
King Philip II promulgated a code that served as guide to all colonized territories of Spain. This code,
which was applied successfully to the Spanish colonies in the Americas, was known as t he Laws of the
Indies. The law provided guidelines for site selection; layout and dimension of squares, streets and other
land uses; and the main phases of planning and construction. Details were also written pertaining to the
location of the principal buildings, recreation s paces, cultivation and pasture lands, and sites for garbage-
producing uses. Also prescribed within the code is the relationship prot ocol between the Spanish and the
natives [Ocampo, 1992].
The royal ordinances dictated that each town should be located on vac ant and high ground, properly
oriented to sun, wind, and water areas. The site should also be on or near fertile land and accessible to
sources of fuel, timber, and water. Because the law is based on the Greco-Roman Renaissance design
principles, it favored the use of the gridiron pattern in the establishment of roads and blocks. The plaza
was the starting point of the construction, around which were the import ant buildings like the churc h, casa
real, town hall, bandstand for z arzuelas and other edifices for health and defense. Other lots surrounding
the area were reserved for merchant shops and prominent family [or principalia] dwellings. The code also
specified that there were to be as many farm lots as town lots. The law likewise states that each house
should have stockyards and courtyards. This could have been the P hilippines' earliest land us e and
zoning law and building code.
The instruction of the Laws of the Indies further aims at providing health, safety, order, and beauty. The
design and execution of the plans should be implemented by architect s or ot her "exec utors" so ordered
by the colonial governor. The final product—i.e. the town—served as the instrument of colonization and
the staging ground for exploiting mineral and land resources [Ocampo, 1992].
In the late 16t h century the Jesuits established the reduccione s p olicy, which was aimed to gather
dispersed communities "under the bells." The policy created the " plaza complex" with its town residents
[taga-bayan]. Within the town [or pueblo], people lived around the plaza with the ilustrados located closest
to the center and the lower classes living at the periphery but still "within the sound of the bells." The taga -
bukid constituted a small minority who had to be in the fields or rural areas attending the agricultural
activities.
This Philippian principle of planning is perhaps best exemplified by the city of Manila. A fter all, " all roads
lead t o Manila and Madrid." The city of Manila became the colonial Capital during the time of Legaspi.
Although Spanish architects and engineers envisioned Manila as a city of stone, she rat her was
developed into a city of fortification. The Manila B ay was palisaded to protect the city from Chinese
pirates [led by Limahong] and other foreign invaders as well as the Muslim and Japanese inhabitants.
This was the precedent of the construction of Intramuros, which was a self -cont ained city "within walls."
Despite the shortcomings of this primate city, Manila expanded partly due to the success of the galleon
trade. The city’s population was racially and culturally di verse. The Tagalogs were the majority. A small
[more than 800] but powerful group was the S panis h. The Spanish friars who were considered the
"masters of the city" owned all but five or six of the city dwellings [Gentil in Ocampo 1992]. Indian and
Chinese residents who are merchants and t raders lived in the areas of Binondo and Sta. Cruz [ Ocampo,
1992].
Thriving industries during the mid-19th c entury were in the production of cotton, silk, dairy and cigar. This
was the same time that the Philippines became a player in the world trade. Some industries like the cigar-
manufacturing in Binondo were so huge that it employ ed 9000 workers [Ocampo, 1992].

Plan for Intramuros Source: http://en.w ikipedia.org/w iki/File:Intramuros-1898.jpg
The population of Manila hit the 300, 000 mark at the turn of the 20t h century. Almost five percent of the
population were living in Intramuros while ot hers were living in the suburbs. Technological advanceme nts
in utilities were introduced at the time which include waterworks and telephone systems. Transportation
systems like railroads and streetcar railways were likewise introduc ed.
Urban design by the Spaniards left a lasting physical mark in the landscape of Philippine cities [as there
was an emphasis on the use of stones for building]. However, efforts to address the economic and social
issues for t he natives was lacking. This was further aggravated by the encomienda [300 in all] system
imposed in the time of Legazpi, which was nothing more than a revival of the medieval serfdom. Although
King Philip II had better int entions in his edict, Spanish town planning was principally done "first for the
purpose of defense and s econd for grandeur…. Housing was not c onsidered at all, as a public
responsibility… The badly -housed were not the concern of the municipality" [Arguilla in Ocampo, 1992].
Regional planning was nonexistent. What only has been done was the establishment of hierarchy of the
political territ ories: the country is divided into provinces [or alcaldias]; the province is divided into pueblos;
and the pueblo is further divided into barangays. The Maura Law of 1893 extended aut onomy to the
provinces. It established a municipal tribunal or council for each town with at least a thousand taxpayers.

American Era
Unlike t he S paniards, the Americans gave greater emphasis on other social values like s anitation,
housing, and other aesthetic improvements. Some of these values, however, were not American in origin.
The ideas of urban development through sanitation practices and mass housing were born as a reaction
to the ills of industrialization in Europe [Benevolo in Ocampo, 1992].
Planning under the influence of the Americans is typified by the Daniel H. Burnham's plan of Manila. In
December 1904, Burnham was commissioned to prepare the physical development plan for the cities of
Manila and B aguio. Trained as an arc hitect and guided by the principles of the City Beautiful Movement,
he envisioned the city manifesting aesthetic elements such as wide boulevards, public edifices and
landscaped parks. In the United States, Burnham dr ew plans for cities like Chicago, Washington,
Cleveland, and San Francisco.
Burnham was not only a man of artistic talents. His successor in the Philippines named William E.
Parsons described him as a man of "sound business judgment and experience," a man who can convince
practical men of business to "make no little plans." Burnham’s objective was to make cities "convenient
for commerce and attractive and healthful as a place of residence [Parsons, 1915]." His plan for Manila
provided for the rapid increase of the population and the explosion of the city’s industries.
Burnham prescribed the grid pattern for the city of Manila. However, the gridiron was inters persed with
the circumferential and diagonal arteries, which was reminiscent of his designs for San Francisco,
Chicago, and Washingt on. He propos ed that the Bay areas would be extended through reclamation and a
new port would be constructed. True to his City Beautiful principles, he further proposed t he development
of nine parks, two new play fields, and fount ains throughout the city for public leisure.
In Burnham's plan, there were sites allotted for national and municipal buildings near Intr amuros,
hospitals, and colleges. Spaces were als o set for a world -class hotel, city and country clubs, a casino,
boat clubs, public baths, and t he new residence for the Governor General. Resorts were also to be
developed near Manila but the ultimate escape during the summer season would be the city of Baguio.
Burnham's plan also called for the development of Binondo as the center of business and merchandising.
Improvements were to be made in the area’s wharf, warehous e, and other port facilities. In additio n to
extension of the port along the P asig, it would also be linked t o railroads extending to north and south
provinces. The plan served as a proposal to the private sector. B urnham hoped that through private
action the expansion and developments in ports and roads would be expedited.

Burnham's plan for Manila
Source: http://www.essential-architecture.com/A RCHITECT/BurnhamPlanOf - Manila.jpg
In 1905, six months after he visited the Philippines, Burnham sent back the preliminary plans back for
Manila. However, another architect was to implement Burnham’s plan. William E. Parsons was appointed
Cons ulting Architect to the Insular Government.
City planning was beginning to get institutionalized during Pars on's time. The Consulting Architect post
occupied by Parsons was considered the nucleus of the Division of Architecture in the Insular Bureau of
Public Works. However, the position of City Architect was created not until 1920, long aft er Parsons left
the post in 1914.
Why Parsons left the post was not clear. Some observers said that it apparently was due to political
reasons. But before Parsons left, the Governor General made sure that general plans for the cities of
Cebu and Zamboanga and master plans for cities like Iloilo were prepared. Among the successors of
Parsons were Doane and Arellano [the latter was a contemporary of Tomas Mapua].
Other city planning issues were tackled later. Different interest groups attended to matters like sanitation
and mass housing. These concerns were neglected by the archit ects and engineers. In 1908, Insular

Healt h workers introduc ed the conc ept of "sanit ary barrios," which were exemplary in the sense that they
reflected the new sanitation and building standards. Other sectors like the labor group established their
own barrio obrero even without the benefit of the aid of the city government.
Post-War Period
In 1936, the Int erior Department created local and planning commissions composed of the P rovincial
Governor, district engineer, and other local officials. The work of the new body included the survey of
local conditions and the preparation of plans t o be proposed to the Director of Public Works. Although
town planning was given a boost during this period, the practice was yet to be established as a discipline.
The problem during this pre-war period was that there was a limited pool of trained city planners both in
the local planning commissions and the Bureau of Public Works.
The Office of the P resident created in 1950 the National Planning Commission [NPC]. The NP C prepared
and helped administer plans and regulations for the local government. After 1959, however, some powers
of the NP C like zoning, subdivision, and building regulation were devolved to the city and municipal
governments.
National and Local Framework

Because planning is considered a regular government function, its existence is asserted in both the
national and local bureaucracies. In the years immediately aft er the war, the government formed the
National Urban Planning Commission [NUPC]. Thereaft er, another body was created: National Planning
Commission. This new organization combined t he functions of the NUP C and the Capital City Planning
Commission. Within ten years, some powers of NP C were devolved to the local government. Successive
reorganization led to the formation of the following planning bodies: Ministry of Settlements, Task Force
on Human S ettlements, Housing and Urban Development Coordinating Council, and Departme nt of
Housing and Urban Development.
E ven before the provisions of the Local Autonomy Law were passed, the local government enjoyed
planning autonomy as early as 1959. Powers like zoning, subdivision, and building regulation were
devolved to the cities and municipalities from the NPC. Later, legislations like the Local Government
Code [ RA 7160] and the Housing and Urban Development Act [RA 7279] further developed the
capabilities of the local government units [LGUs]. Although the transition was not smooth, the LGUs
exercised their powers as exemplified by the cas es of University of the East versus the City of Manila and
of Far East Bank versus Ortigas.
Of Land and Laws

There are other covenants affecting the planning process in the Philippines in general. The Housing and
Land Use Regulatory B oard has a manual that complements the Local Government Code [LGC] of 1991.
Others like Executive Order 71 [1993] seeks to ensure the efficient devolution of powers to the local
government units and provide for an orderly and smooth transition as well as definition of future
relationships between the national and local governments. Passed almost simultaneously with EO 71,
Executive Order 72 provides for the preparation and implementation of the Comprehensive Land Use
Plans [CLUP] for the Local Government Units. These two executive orders aim at complementing the
Local Government Code of 1991 and other pertinent laws. In addition, the local government can also
reclassify agricultural lands to other uses by virtue of Memorandum Circular 54 of 1993.
The Philippine Constitution of 1987 is also a sourc e of planning ideals regarding urban land reform and
housing. In Section 9, it declares that "the State shall, by law, and for the common good, undertake, in
cooperation with the private sector, a continuing program of urban land reform and housing which will
make available at affordable cost, decent housing and basic services to under -privileged and homeless
citizens in urban centers and resettlement areas. It shall also promote a dequate employment
opportunities to such citizens. In the implementation of such program the Stat e shall respect the rights of
small property owners." In Section 10 it continues that "urban or rural poor dwellers shall not be evicted
nor t heir dwelling demolished, except in accordance with law and in a just and humane manner. No

resettlement of urban or rural dwellers shall be undertak en without adequate consultation with them and
the communities where they are to be relocat ed."
The Urban Land Reform Law [PD 1517] was passed during the administration of Marc os. With its
impressive rhetoric, it states that "it is the policy of the State to liberate human communities from blight,
promote their development and modernization, and bring about the optimum use of t he land as a national
resource for public welfare." Although not clear if it repeals PD 1517, the Urban Development and
Housing Act, otherwise known as Republic Act 7279, was passed in 1992 before t he term of President
Corazon Aquino ended. However, the spirit of this law is too philanthropic as it basically promises
provision of housing for the homeless citizens.
One of t he basic urban planning problems is housing. For the past decades, legislators formulat ed and
accumulated laws regarding the provision of one of the basic human needs that is housing. For one, there
is the Presidential Decree 957 of 1976, which mandat es the protection of subdivision and condominium
buyers. Two years later, another law [PD 1344] was enacted empowering the National Housing
Authority[NHA] to regulated and police the real estate trade and business. In 1982, Batas Pambansa 220
authorized t he Ministry of S ettlements to urge the private sector to provide " economic and socialized
housing" for the middle and lower income earners.
Land use is one of the concerns of urban and regional planners. Issues pert aining to land us e include the
land reclassification and conversion to other use. Executive Order 124 of 1993 serves as a guide to the
procedure of land evaluation for conversion. Asid e from reacting to the issues of land of land use, the
Congress was also quick to answer the problems posed by the real estate developers. The response was
the Executive Order 184, which is a directive to create socialized housing center one -stop processing
centers to facilitate the processing and issuance of permits, clearances, certifications, and licenses
appropriate and necessary for t he implementation of socialized housing projects. The same law also
orders all government agencies concerned to support the operations of the said centers.
The problem of squatting or the unlawful occupation of land duly owned by another person or
organization is another problem faced by city planners. This problem has been in existence in the cities of
the country since after the War [ Tiglao, 2002]. In 1997, Republic Act 8368 repealed Republic Act 772,
which is entitled "Penalizing Squatting and Other Similar Acts." The new law, which was passed during
the Ramos administration, decriminaliz es squatting in all its forms.
A strategy for building up capability for regional planning and development is the establishment of an
authority that will administer the development of a special region [e.g. a component city]. This idea is
exemplified by Republic Act 7924, which is "an act creating the Metropolitan Manila Development
Authority [MMDA], defining its powers and functions, providing funds therefore and for other purposes."
The powers of the MMDA include development [physical] planning, transport and traffic management,
solid waste disposal and management, flood control and sewage management, urban renewal and
zoning, health and sanitation, and upholding of public safety. The territory of the A uthority is comprised of
the cities of Caloocan, Manila, Mandaluyong, Makati, Pasay, Pas ig, Quezon, and Muntilupa as well as the
municipalities of Las Piñas, Malabon, Marikina, Navot as, Parañaque, Pateros, San Juan, Taguig, and
Valenzuela.
THEORIES IN URBAN AND REGIONAL PLANNING

PLANNING DEFINITIONS. Planning in general is a thinking and social proce ss. Intellectual thought
processes (thinking aspect) as well as policies and actions (social aspect) are needed to bridge the gap
between what is likely and what is desired.
Other specific definitions of planning include:

 A process for determining appropriate future action through a s equence of choices (Davidoff &
Reiner, 1962)

 A process of preparing a set of decisions for action in the future directed at achieving goals by
preferable means (Dron, 1963)
 An orderly sequence of actions which is designed to achieve a stated goal (Hall, 19??)
 A sequence of actions which are designed to solve problems in the future (Glasson, 1974)
 Foresight in formulating and implementing programs and policies (Hudson, 1979)
PLANNING PROCESS. Whatever t he purpose may be, the planning proc ess generally includes a set of
activities that remain invariant across different planning philosophies – a sort of general format to follow.
To illustrate, several examples are presented:
Example 1
Problem Structuring

Identification and E valuation of Alternative Responses

Implementation

Monitoring and E valuation
From Thomas Saaty, 1985
Example 2
Identification of a Problem

Formulation of Goals

Identification of Objectives and Targets

Determination of Constraints and Opportunities

Projection for Future Situation

Generation and E valuation of Alternative Courses of Action

Implementation of Preferred Plan

Monitoring and E valuation
From John Glasson, 19??
Example 3
Data

Description

Desires


Designs

Decision

Deed
From Britton Harris
SYSTEMS PLANNI NG – derived from the science of cybernetics: cybernetics was identified by Norman
Weiner in 1948, an American mathematician and thinker.
 Conc erned with urban and regional systems viewing them as complex interacting systems.
 The planning or controlling system and the system which it seeks to control.
Three leading Briti sh exponents of cybernetics-based planning:
 George Chadwick
 Alan Wilson
 Brian McLoughlin
COMP REHENSIVE PLANNI NG – evolved from a physical planning model from the 1920s to 1930s as
exemplified by British planner Patrick Geddes’s S-A-P and Ebenezer Howard’s Garden City.
 Ceas ed to be the universal planning standard by 1970.
GROWTH POLE/CENTER THEORY
 Francis Perroux – Growth Pole

 Boudeville (1966) – Growth Center
 Conc ept of Leading Industries
 Conc ept of Propulsive Firms
 Albert Hirshman – Polarization
 Gunnar Myrdal – Backwash and Spread Effects
 Scale Economies
 Agglomeration Economies
CENTRAL PLACE THEORY. By Walter Christaller, 1933. Explains the size and function of settlements
and their relationship with their hint erlands.
 Hierarchy of Service s – hierarchical arrangement of c enters and functions based on service

activities from low order to high order services found only in major urban centers.
 Market Range – maximum distance a consumer is willing to travel to avail of a good or service
beyond which people will look to another center.
 Threshold Population – minimum population necessary to support a service.
CORE-P ERIP HERY.

 By John Friedmann. Unbalanced growth results to dualism – North and South, growing points
and lagging regions.
 Dualistic economies.
 Toffler – technologic al apartheid.
DEPENDENCY THEORY.
 Development of First World derived from underdevelopment of Third World, neo-colonialism.
 Advocat ed by Latin American economists and planners like Cesar Furtado.

INDUSTRI AL LOCATION THEORY. Generally, an economic theory that attempts to incorporat e the
location factor into the “theory of the firm” and tries to explain the existing structure of industrial location
and changes in that structure.
 Least Cost Approach. – Minimization of total costs (transport and production costs) in site
selection. Supply-oriented.
 Market Area Analysi s. – Optimum location is the site of maximum profit, one that affords
greatest access to market and serve great est demand. Demand -orient ed.
 Profit Maximizing Approach. – Cost and demand factors of location combined. Cost reducing
and revenue increasing.
STAGES OF ECONOMIC GROWTH. By Walt w. Rostow, 1960. “The Stages of Economic Growt h: A
Non-Communist Manifesto.
 A neo-classi cal theory on economic growth and development. A take -off theory, wherein there
are five stages of economic development:
 1. Traditional Society – basically an agricultural society characterized by low productivity, low
technology. Power is concentrated in the hands of the landed elite, and value system is oriented
towards fatalism.
 2. Preconditions for Take-Off – transitional period when a society prepares itself for take -off,
new and higher functions due to modern science. Investments are used for social overhead
capital and infrastructure.
 3. Take-Off – development of one or more leading manufacturing sectors. Start of self-
sustaining growth. Profits are reinvested.
 4. Drive to Maturity – the “automobile age,” modern technology and techniques, growt h of urban
population, white-collar workers.
 5. Age of High Mass Consumption – inc reasing purchasing power of the consumer,
service/tertiary sector become dominant. Welfare state.
1. ELEMENTS OF HUMAN SETTLEMENTS (DOXIADIS)

 Nature – the natural physical environment.
 Man – an individual, Homo Sapiens – biological needs (oxygen, nutrition), sensation and
perception (five senses), emotional needs (satisfaction, security, sense of belonging), moral
values.
 Society – a group of individuals sharing the same culture, values, norms, mores, and traditions.
 Shells – buildings, the built component – housing, hospitals, schools, town halls, commercial
establishments, recreational facilities, industrial buildings, etc.
 Networks – links within the settlement and with other settlements, transportation systems,
communication systems, water supply systems, power and electrical systems, etc.
HIERARCHY OF SETTLEMENTS
 A hamlet, a neighborhood, a small village.
 A community, a town.
 A city, an urban area.
 A metropoli s.
 A conurbation – a composition of cities, metropolises, urban areas.
 A megalopolis – merging of two or more met ropolises wit h a population of 10 million or more, a
th
20 century phenomenon.
CITY vs. URBAN

 City – as defined by RA 7160, a minimum income of P20 M, at least 10,000 has. In land area or
minimum population of 150,000, a political or legal status granted by the government.
 Highly Urbanized City – at least 200,000 people; income of P50M or more.
 Component Ci ty – population & income below that of highly urbaniz ed city.

 Independent Component City – a chartered city with a population and income below those
required for a city but whos e charter makes it independent from the province.
 Urban Area – as defined by NSO: in their entirety, all cities and municipalities with a density of at
least 1000/sq km; central districts (poblaciones) of municipalities and cities with a density of at
least 500/sq km; central districts, regardless of population size, exhibiting a street pattern or
street net work, at least 6 establishments, a town hall, church or chapel, public plaza, park,
cemetery, market; and barangays having at least 1000 people and meeting the previous
conditions.
INTERNAL SPATIAL STRUCTURE OF CITIES

CONCENTRIC ZONE THEORY (Monocentri c). By E. W. Burge ss, a University of Chicago sociologist,
in 1925. The city grows in a radial expansion from the center to form a series of concentric z ones or
circles such as in Chicago.
 CBD (Core, Loop).
 Zone of Transition.
 Homes of Factory Workers .
 Residential Zone of High Class Apartment Buildings or Single -Family Dwellings.
 Commuters Zone.
 The process of inva sion and succe ssion explains the successive rings.
SECTOR THEORY. By Homer Hoyt, an economist, in 1939. Hoyt examined the spatial variations in
household rent in 142 American cities.
Rent patterns are not in the form of succe ssive circle s but appear as sectors. High rent residential
sectors are most important in explaining city growth as it pulls the growth of entire city in the same
direction, usually outward along transport routes.
MULTIPLE NUCLEI THEORY (Pol ycentric). Developed by two geographers Chauncy Harri s and
Edward Ullman in 1945. Cities tend to grow around not one but several distinct nuclei.
The proc ess is historical due to certain highly specialized activities, certain unrelated functions which
repel each ot her, etc.
INVERS E CONCENTRIC ZONE THEORY. The preceding three theories apply primarily to cities of
MDCs, particularly American. Many cities in the LDCs follow s omewhat different patterns – this is a
reversal of the concentric zone pattern.
BASIC ELEMENTS OF THE CITY

THE IMAGE OF THE CITY. A collective image – map or impressions – map of a city, a collective picture
of what people extract from the physical reality of a city.
There are five basic elements which people use to construct their mental image of a city: (Kevin L ynch).
Pathways – major and minor routes of circulation to move about, the city has a network of major routes and a
neighborhood network of minor routes; a building has several main routes which people use to get to it or
from it. An urban highway network is a network of pathways for a whole city.
Districts – A city is composed of component neighborhoods or districts; its center, uptown , midtown, its in-town
residential areas, trainyards, factory areas, suburbs, college campuses, etc. Sometimes they are
considerably mixed in character and do not have distinct limits like the midtown in Manhattan.
Edges – the termination of a district is its edge. Some districts have no distinct edges at all but gradually taper
off and blend into another district. When two districts are joined at an edge they form a seam. A narrow
park may be a joining seam for two urban neighborhoods.

Landmarks – the prominent visual features of the city; some are very large and are seen at great distances;
some are very small and can only be seen up close (street clock, a fountain, or a small statue in a park).
Landmarks help in orienting people in the city and help identify an area.
Nodes – a center of activity; distinguished from a landmark by virtue of its active function; it is a distinct hub of
activity. Times Square in New York City is both a landmark and a node.
These five elements of urban form are s ufficient to make a useful visual survey of the form of a city. The y are the
skeletal elements of city form.
INTRODUCTION TO ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING
ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING
is a deliberate, organized and continuous process of identifying different eleme nts and as pects of the
environment (social, economic, physical, political) determining their present state and int eraction,
projecting them in concert throughout a period of time in the future and formulating and programming a
set of actions and plans to attain desired results.
NATURE and SCOPE OF ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNI NG
DYNAMIC: Changes overtime, technological change; cultural norms and traditions; not static; responsive
to new demands and needs of people.
CYCLIC: Unending process; Always goes back to whe re it started; Were the problems solved?
Goals and objectives attained? At what level of satisfaction?
MULTI-DISCIPLINARY: Requires the expertise of various disciplines; economics; engineering; sociology;

architecture; law; geography etc.
CONTINUOUS: Plan is prepared, approved, implement ed; reviewed and evaluated; replan again based
on new demands of the time.
TIME-B OUND: Plan must have a time perspective; short, medium, long range; Basis for plan review and
assessment.
COMP REHE NSIVE: Covers all aspects of man and his environment; physical, social, economics,
political administration and the natural environment.
PROGRAM is a collection of complementary projects/activities formulated to achieve the

functions/objectives of a sector. Programs describe in detail the kind and quantities of resources to be
used.
PROJECT is a self-cont ained unit of investment aimed at developing resources and facilities within a
limited area within a given time period. A project deals with goods and services significant to the
accomplishment of national, regional and local development plans.
SECTOR is an element or sub-system of the entire community development system having specific
functions and subject to program planning.
STANDARD is an accepted criterion or established meas ure for determining performance; a rule by
which somet hing is evaluated.

COMMON DEFINITIONS
CONCEPT PLAN: the output of the first stage activities in the preparation of a development plan. It
consists of an overall growth pattern, strat egy, sectoral polic ies and population and employment target
and forecasts.
CONSULTATION: is the proc ess of obtaining technical advise or opinion whic h may be or may not be
followed. This is why there are experts in all fields of endeavor acting as consult ants.
LOCAL PLANS : are t he outputs of the second stage activities in the preparation of a development plan.
The plan consists of action area plans, district plans, sectoral programs, and finally projects for
implementation.
DEVELOPMENT PLAN: is a series of written statements accompanied by maps, illustrations and

diagrams which describe what the community wants to become and how it wants to develop. It is
essentially composed of c ommunity goals, objectives, policies, programs and a land use/ physical
development plan which translates the various sectoral plans.
URBAN and REGIONAL PLANNING DIFFERS FROM OTHER FORMS OF PLANNING IN S EV ERAL
IMPORTANT ASPECTS:
1. It is concerned primarily with public issues involving a broadly defined group of clients with
diverse interests;
2. It is a deliberate, self-conscious activity that usually involves persons trained professionally as

planners;
3. It’s goals and objectives, as well as the means of achieving them, are oft en highly uncertain;
4. Urban and regional planners t hemselves seldom make decisions; rather they lay out major
alternatives and recommendations for thos e elected or appointed to make such decisions;
5. Urban and regional planners employ a variety of specialized tools and met hods in analyzing and
presenting alt ernatives;
6. The results of most planning activities are discernible only 5 to 20 years after the decision is
made, making feedback and corrective measures difficult.
LEVELS OF PLANNING:
National, Regional, and Local Planning
AREAS OF PLANNING
National
Regional
Sub-Regiona
Provincial
Metropolitan
City/Municipal
District
Barangay
Subdivision

SECTORS OF PLANNING
Tourism
Infrastructure
Industry Social
Residential/Housing
Agriculture Economic
Trans port Land Use
Communications Physical
Utilities Land Resource
Education Environmental
Social Welfare
Natural Resources Administrative
Manpower
Healt h
Fiscal
SCOPE OF PLANNING/COVERAGE
Perspective Structure Integrated Development

Conc ept Framework Comprehensive Detailed
TIME/DURA TION OF PLA N
Short Term 1 year or less

Medium Term 5 years
Long Range 10 years and above
ENVIRONMENTA L PLANNING as a PROFESS ION

FRAMEWORK OF THE INTE RRELA TIONS HIP among the THREE ACTORS IN GOVERNANCE
GOVERNMENT ~ creat es a conducive political and legal

environment
BUSINESS SECTOR ~ generat es values, jobs and inc ome
CIV IL SOCIE TY ~ facilitates political and social interaction

mobilizing groups to participate in economic, social, political
activities
PRODUCTIVE SECTOR ~ is the t erm used to describe the

objective of what an effective governance wants to attain
POLICY PLANNING and COMPRE HENS IVE PLANNING
SCOPE: Policy planning is directed at a particular issue, whereas comprehensive planning considers all
aspects of a system simultaneously, whether or not any specific problem or opportunity relating to that
aspect has been identified. Comprehensive Transport Plan considers (usage, costs, facilities, pollution,
population, employment, land uses, travel patterns, etc.) w hile a P olicy Plan focuses on a s pecific issue,
such as the regulation of taxicabs at the airport.
PRODUCT: Comprehensive planners usually develop a plan. The product of policy planning include
memoranda, position papers, draft legislations, and even let ters or phone calls.
CLIENT: The client of traditional comprehensive planning is the public interest; planners guess at the
joint preferences and opinions of this mythical client and int erpret these opinions as they see fit. The
client of policy planning is very real. A mayor, department sec retary, a vice president of a company, a
director or whoever commissioned the analysis.
POLITICS: Traditional comprehensive planning embraces an apolitical approach to the process of

implementation; policy planning maybe very political. Government planning uses bot h while privat e clients
will only be interested in policy planning.
ROS TOW’s FIVE S TAGES OF GROW TH
1. TRADITIONAL S OCIE TY. One whose structure is developed within limited production functions,
where ec onomy is characterized by a low level of savings.
2. PRE-CONDITIONS FOR TAKE -OFF. P eriod of t ransition between t he traditional society and
take-off when the pre-conditions for an inc rease in output are developed. There are c hanges in
attitudes and values brought about by internal and external change.
3. TAKE-OFF PERIOD. Start of self-sustaining growth, the rate of I increases as a fraction of output
as new industries expand and profits are reinvested.
4. THE DRIVE TO MA TURITY. The stage where techniques in production impro ve, new industries
accelerat e, and the economy takes its place in the international trading community. It
demonstrates its capacity to move beyond take -off.
5. THE AGE OF HIGH MASS CONS UMP TION. The stage where real per capita income increases
such that more people have a command over c onsumptions; welfare considerations emerge and
the servic es sector becomes the dominant sector.

Ekistics
EKIS TICS - Study of Human Settlements ((Constantino Doxiadis, Greek Planner); balance between the
elements of human settlements as a goal
for EKIS TICS, we are dealing by necessity with:
Nature, which is being spoilt

Man, who is continuously changing
Society, which is changing because of man’s new needs
Shells, which must be constructed
Networks, which are also changing to cope up with new demands

EVOLUTION OF SE TTLEMENTS
1. Primitive non-organized human settlements: E volution of man

2. Primitive organized settlements: Ecopolis (Villages) 10,000 yrs.
3. Static urban settlements or cities: Polis 5,000-6,000 yrs.
4. Dynamic urban settlements: Dynapolis 200-400 yrs.
5. Universal City: Ecumenopolis which is now beginning
THE P RACTICE OF ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING IN THE

PHILIPPINES
Scope of Practice – Environmental Planners offer professional services in the form of:
1. Technical consultation
2. Plan preparation
3. Implementation involving
a. development of a community, town, city or region

b. development of a particular site such as housing; centers of education, culture, recreation
or government; industrial estates
c. creation of spatial arrangements of buildings, communication routes, and utilities
d. land use and zoning plans
e. pre-investment, pre-feasibility, and control of the environment
Why Plan?
The world is full of constant change. The faster things change, the more dangerous the world seems.
The more dangerous the world seems, the more insecure we feel. Planning is goal-oriented behavior
aimed at improving stability and order.
All forms of planning represent existing conditions, describe future scenarios, and prescribe courses of
action to make the transition from one to the ot her.
Stages in Real Estate Development and Planning
Inception of an idea
Developer with background knowledge of the market looks for needs to fill, sees possibilities, has lots
of ideas, does quick feasibility in his mind

Refinement of the idea
Developer finds specific site for the idea; looks into physical feasibility; talks with prospective buyers,
lenders, part ners, planners; settles on tentative design; options the land if the idea looks good
Real Estate Development and Planning
Feasibility
Developer commissions formal market study to estimate market absorption; commissions feasibility
study comparing estimated value of project to cost; processes plans through government agencies
Contract negotiation
Developer decides on final design based on what the market study says buyers want and will pay for.
Cont racts are negotiated. He gets loan commitment in writing; decides on contractor, and gathers permits
from government
Formal commitment
Contracts are signed- joint venture agreement, construction loan, permanent loan commitment,
construction contract, exercise of land purchas e option, purchase of insurance, pre-selling agreements
Construction
Developer switches to formal accounting system, seeking to keep all costs within budget. He approves
all changes suggested by marketing people; resolves construction disputes; makes progress payments;
keeps work on schedule
Completion and formal opening
Developer brings in full-time operating people; increases advertising. Government approves

occupancy; utilities are connected; buyers move in. Construction lender is taken out and permanent loan
is closed
Asset and property management
Owners oversee property management including leasing or resale, management of fixed assets,
reconfiguration, remodeling, re-making space as necessary to extend economic life and enhance
performance of asset
Advantages of Using Urban Planners
Vertical Integration
Planners are able to relate a real estate development project to its larger context – barangay,
town/city, metro area, and region – whose fut ure growth impacts on the viability of the project

Sectoral Integration
Projects are influenced by many factors – affordability, social, environmental, economic, etc.
Planners are trained to analyze these sectoral issues and their
inter - linkages
Advantages of Using Urban Planners
Systematic Approach
While project investments are often decided by “gut feel”, urban planners can help developers in
systematically analyzing potentials, constraints, and product features
Enhanced Project Viability
Experienced urban planners can enhance a project’s viability by participating actively in produc t
development, contributing his/her creativity in the process

Module 2. PHYSICAL
PLANNING

PHYSI CAL PLANNING – shall mean the rational use of land for development purposes.
Factors to S tudy:
Land Use Planning
Planning Principles
Ecological Balance
Preservation/Conservation
Urban Land Use Planning
Physical Infrastructure Development
LAND USE PLANNING

PLANNING – the key to orderly and rational land development in any local government unit, i.e. a city or
municipality.
CLUP (Comprehensive Land Use Plan) – prescribes the development pac e, direction and strategies for
the optimum use of land resources in a community as well as its role in provincial and national
development.
CONCEPTS RELATED TO LAND USE

REVERSIBLE USES – cases when the inherent features and characteristics of the land have not been considerably
altered or modified such that the soil horizon, landform, and structure remain intact so that the land can be reverted to
its former use or original condition.
IRREVERSIBLE USES – when land is subject to applications which brought about changes, alteration or
modifications so much so that it preempts the original use or it is physically impossible to restore the land to its
previous state or condition.
MULTIPLE LAND USES – combining different land uses, whether reversible or irreversible, in an orderly and
desirable pattern because:
 Land is finite and supply is finite
 Demand is ever increasing
 Competition is there
 Land can indeed have more than one use and uses can be combi ned in different ways.
COMPATIBLE AND INCOMPATIBLE LAND USES – a related concept of multiple uses of land is the compatibility of
uses. Some land uses are innately incompatible while others are completely compatible. Compatible uses can
coexist harmoniously and effectively in an orderly management.
HIGHEST AND BEST USE OF THE LAND

 The use of land which generates the maximum profit without negative consequences especially on the
environment
 Land should be used in such a manner consistent with its natural qualities to maximize its productivity and
also adhere to the principles of sustainable development.
 Simply put, it is utilizing land in a manner that is beneficial to both man and environment.

ZONING
ZONING DEFI NED.
 Zoning is a legal regulatory tool to implement the land use plan.
 Zoning is the designation and allocation of territorial areas of city or municipality into functional land use
zones and districts.
 Uses in accord with goals and objectives of local development plan.
NATIONAL LAND US E AND ALLOCATION SCHEME
 Land Classifi cation which involves the assessment of unclassified lands under the public
domain which include surveying, classifying, studying and mapping areas into agricultural, forest
or timber, mineral and national parks;
o National government/DENR; congress delineates limits of forest lands and national
parks.
 Land Reclassi fication is the subs equent classification, allocation and disposition of lands of the
public domain, classified as alienable and disposable into specific uses;
o National government/DE NR in coordination wit h LGUs.
 Land Subclassi fication is the act of determining and assigning the uses of classified public
lands;
o National government/DE NR
 Zoning is the legislative act of delineating areas or districts within the territorial jurisdictions of
cities and municipalities that may be put to specific us es and their regulation, s ubject to the
limitations imposed by law or competent authority;
o LGUs
 Land Use Conversion is the act of putting a piece or parcel of land into a type of use other than
that for which it is currently being utilized.
o National government/DA R
Land Use refers to the manner of utilization of land, including its allocation, development and management.
Land Use Conversion refers to the act or process of changing the current use of a piece of agricultural land into
some other use.
Land Use Plan refers to a document embodying a set of policies accompanied by maps and similar illustrations
which represent the community desired pattern of population distribution and a proposal for the future allocation of
land to the various land-using activities.
Network of Protected Areas for Agriculture (NPAA) refers to land reserved for agricultural activities. The specific
types of land reserved for agricultural activities covered by the NPAA are:
 All irrigated and potentially irrigable land
 All alluvial, plain land that are highly suitable for agricultural production and/or can be devoted to food
production
 All sustainable land that are traditional sources of food
 All crop land that support the existing economic scale of production required to sustain the economic viability
of existing agricultural infrastructure and agro-based enterprises in the province or region
 All productive land in the low-calamity risk areas that are suitable for the production of economic trees and
other cash crops
 All agricultural land that are ecologically fragile and whose conversion will result in serious environmental
problems
National Integrated Protected Areas System is the classification and administration of all designated protected
areas to maintain essential ecological processes and life-support systems, to preserve genetic diversity, to ensure
sustainable use of resources found therein, and to maintain their natural conditions to the extent possible.

Premature Conversion of Agricultural Land means the undertaking of any development activities whose results
will modify or alter the physical characteristics of the agricultural lands to render them sustainable for non-agricultural
purposes without an approved order of conversion from the DAR.
Prime Agricultural Lands refer to lands that can be used for various or specific agricultural activities and can
provide optimum and sustainable yield with a minimum of inputs and development cost as determined by the DA.
Protected Areas refer to identified portions of land and water set aside by reason of their unique physical and
biological significance, managed to enhance biological diversity, and protected against destructive human
exploitation.
Reclassification of Agricultural Lands refers to the act of specifying how agricultural lands shall be utilized for non -
agricultural uses such as residential, industrial, commercial, as embodied in the land use plan, subject to the
requirements and procedure for conversion.
Regional Agri-Industrial Growth Centers are specific locations in each of the country’s regions outside the National
Capital Region (NCR) identified for development by providing it with the full range of infrastructure/utilities needed by
industries to establish operations in the countryside.
Regional Growth Networks/Corridors are neighboring provinces/regions which are linked together and are
identified through the collaboration and cooperation of various LGUs. The linking of these areas permits the
comparative advantages/strengths of each area to be shared with one another, thereby ensuring the optimum
utilization of resources and the development of networks/corridors and i ts radiation areas.
Socialized Housing refers to housing programs and projects covering houses and lots or homelots only undertaken
by the government or the private sector for the underprivileged and homeless citizens which shall include site and
services development, long-term financing, liberalized terms on interest payments, and such other benefits in
accordance with RA 7279.
Specialized Economic Zones refer to selected areas with highly developed or which have the potential to be
developed into agro-industrial, industrial, tourist/recreational, commercial, banking, investment and financial centers.
An ecozone may contain any or all of the following: industrial estates, export processing zones, free trade zones, and
tourist/recreational centers.
Tourism De velopment Areas refer to specific sites for tourism development located in areas identified as priorities
in the national and regional master plans as well as those designated through legislative and executive issuances as
tourist spots and tourist zones which can be developed into tourism estates or integrated resort, leisure and
recreation complexes, and other tourism related facilities.
Watershed refers to a catchment area or drainage basin from which the waters of a stream or stream system are
drawn.
Zoning refers to the delineation/division of a city/municipality into functional zones where only specific land uses are
allowed. It directs and regulates the use of all lands in the community in accordance with an approved or adopted
land use plan for the city/municipality. It prescribes setback provisions, minimum lot sizes, building heights and bulk.
Zoning Ordinance refers to a local legislation approving the development control/zoning plan and providing for the
regulations and other conditions, on the uses of land including the limitation on the infrastructures that may be placed
thereon within the territorial jurisdiction of a city or municipality.
M APPING
MAP – a graphical representation of a place or particular phenomena or themes in an area. It is a convenient visual
form of spatial data, their distribution and relationships. A reduced and simplified model of reality containing
geographic information. It is a graphic depiction of all or part of a geographic realm where th e real-world features
have been replaced with symbols in their correct spatial location at a reduced scale.

URBAN LAND USE MAP COLOR CODES
Category Color
RESIDENTIAL YELLOW
By dwelling type
COMMERCIAL RED
Wholesale, Retail (Gen. Merchandise), Services (Auto Repair,
Hotels, etc.)
INDUSTRIAL VIOLET
Manufacturing, Fabricating, Assembly, Industries, etc.
INSTITUTIONAL BLUE
Schools, Church, Protective Servic es, Government Buildings, etc.
PARKS/PLAYGROUNDS GREEN
Golf Courses, Race Tracks, Country Club, etc.
INFRASTRUCTURE/ UTILITIES GRAY
Railroad, Land Transport, Water Transport, Air Transport, etc.
BUILT- UP AREAS YELLOW
Cluster of at least 10 structures or if activ ity occupies sizable land
AGRICULTURE LIGHT GREEN
Cropland, Riceland, etc.
AGRO-INDUSTRIAL LIGHT VIOLET
Piggery, Poultry
FOREST DARK GREEN
Production Forest, Wildlife, Watershed, National Parks
MINING/QUARRYING BROWN
GRASSLAND/PASTURE OLIVE GREEN
SWAMPLAND/MARSHES AQUA
OTHER LAND USE APPROPRIATE

Cemeteries, Dumpsite, Landfill, Reclamation, Idle Vacant Lots, etc. COLORS
ELEMENTS OF A MAP
 Map Title – defines the information and purpose of a map.
 Legend – ke y to the codes and symbols used in a map.
 Date and Author – name of map maker and date of survey or period covered by it.
 North Arrow – usually, maps are oriented towards the geographic (true) north.
 Geographic Coordinates – geographic grid known as latitudes and longitudes.
o Latitude (parallels) – distance measured north and south of the equator.
o Longitude (meridians) – distance measured east and west with the imaginary prime meridian
(Greenwich Laboratory in London) as reference line.
 Scale – ratio distance on the map itself and the corresponding distance on the ground.
o Graphic Scale – line or bar marked off in graduated distances representing actual distances on the
ground.
o Numerical/Functional- compares map distance with ground distance by proportional numbers and
expressed as a representative fraction or ratio. Example: 1:1,000 means 1 meter on the map is
equivalent to 1,000 meters or 1 kilometer on the ground.
TYP ES OF MAPS
1. GENERAL PURPOS E – shows suite of physical and cultural features at the same time.
Reference Map – shows simple properties of map data.

Example: world map, road map, sketch map.
Base Map – working map for the preparation of various maps.

Example: general base map, urban base map.
2. THEMATI C – depicts one single feature of the earth’s surface representing one or two themes.
Topographic Map – shows a limited set of features including terrain, streams, boundaries, and roads.
Climate Map – gives the prevailing type of rainfall in the area.

Hydrogeologic Map – shows existing geologic features, rock types and ground and surface water.
Slope Map – groups area exhibiting a particular range or degree of inclination.
Soil Map – shows the spatial distribution of different soil classification units in a locality.
Land Classification Map – categories of land by the Forest Management Bureau.

1. Forest Reserve
2. Mossy Forest
3. Commercial Forest
4. Logged Over Areas
5. Parks and Wildlife Sanctuaries
6. Swamp lands/Water bodies
7. Alienable and Disposable Land
Population Density Map – shows concentration of population by class intervals in relation to land area.
Cadastral Map – public record of land ownership.
Land Values Map – indicates relative prices and values of land in an area.
Land Use Map – shows spatial distribution of different land uses.

General Land Use –distribution of land uses covering the entire town.
General Land Use Plan –reflects the planned distribution of land uses.
Urban Land Use Map – distribution of land uses in the urban center.
Urban Land Use Plan –indicates planned distribution of urban land uses.
Zoning Map – shows the zones or districts according to present and potential uses of land.
3. ANALYTICAL – illustrates the derived results from the analysis of two or more variables according
to desired outputs.
Erosion Hazard Map – analysis of soil and slope of an area.
Flooding Hazard – shows areas where flooding usually occur.
Land Capability Map – indicates suitability of areas for cultivation.
Soil Suitability Map – pro vides information on the degree of soil suitability for urban development.
Development Constraints Map – illustrates the obstacles to development in the physical sense like
subsidence, flooding risks, or fault lines.
Land Management Unit – a land resources inventory map describing the shape of land in terms of
relief, not slope; an input map to land suitability map.
Land Suitability Map – classifies land into categories based on the degree to which the characteristics
of the land can satisfy the environmental requirements of specific crops without deterioration.
SITE: CONCEPTS AND P RINCIPLES

(By Kevin Lynch)
Every site is a unique interconnected web of things and activities that imposes limitations and offers possibilities.
A site or project/planning area varies in size, location, and characteristics. “A site in its own right is a
living, changing community of plants and animals.” Such a community also has its own interests that
should be conserved, preserved or prot ected.

Knowledge of the site i s vital in planning especially in mitigating competing or conflicting interests
between potential users and existing occupants to avert natural disasters such as severe erosion , water
intrusion, flooding, a drop in the water table, etc.
The site and its intended purpose are closely interrelat ed. Understanding the site to define or establish
the essential character or nature of the site or “the spirit of the place” to maintain, to some degree, a
continuity of the preexisting conditions within the locale.
A sufficient knowledge and understanding of the nature of the site would make the planner much
conscious and sensi tive to the site’ s di stinct character and “closely knit” c omplexity “as to be worthy
of his interest, concern, and even his affection. ”
Understanding the site has two branches – one oriented to the users and the other to the site itself.
SITE INVENTORY and ASS ESSMENT

 Involves a t horough assessment of the natural environment and the associated physical
characteristics of the site and its surroundings.
 Such factors are found above, below, and on the ground, for they make up the nature of the site.
 Knowing t hese factors and their interrelationships enabl es one to determine si te constraints
(threats) and potentials (opportunitie s).
 Knowledge of constraints and threats can mitigate or minimize potential damage or adverse
effects that site development may caus e on the ecological and social fabric within the site or
within the general vicinity of the site.
 Knowledge of the pot entials and opportunities of the site can clarify, reveal, or enhance the
nature of the site as well as the plan or design.
PREP ARING A SITE PROFILE. Site inventory and assessment require the c ollection of comprehensive
and structured sets of data descriptive of the geophysical, biological, and social environment in the
site and around the site. A site profile is the outcome of this activity.
For planners, site profile provides information on the status and characteristics of the various aspects
of the environment which are indicative of the potentials and weaknesses of a particular area.
For decision makers, the site profile provides information on the environment needed in t he
formulation of policies, strategies, or business decisions pertaining specifically to the area or to
the environment in general.
For thos e concerned with the assessment and monitoring of the environment, the site profile provides
benchmark information on the environment with which various scenarios can be drawn up with
the introduction of particular development project/s.
In general, The Site Profile is a valuable tool:

In making better decisions and trade-offs for more rational or sustainable de velopment;
In taking stock of or assessing the status of the environment of an area as of a given time;
In providing information on the environment for consideration in project planning and development as
well as for monitoring and evaluation of a proj ect’s impact on the environment;
In preparing and evaluating the Initial Environment Examination or the Environment al Impact
Assessment (EIA); and
In providing information for the purposes of management and conservation of the environment.
ECOLOGICAL BALANCE
The environment in which the man and other organisms live is called the biosphere. The biosphere is
made up of different regions that have different types of flora (plants) and fauna (animals). The types of
organisms in an area are determined by various factors such as the climate, temperat ure, rainfall, etc.
The regions based on their physical and biological nature are classified into ecosystems. For example,
pond ecosystem, evergreen forest ecosystem, desert ecosystem, etc. The organisms, in addition to being

dependent on the environment for their needs, are also dependent on each other. This dependency is
especially for food. This results in the pres ence of food chains and food webs.
Figure 1: Food Chain in Nature (P = producer, H = herbivore, C1 = carnivore order-1, C2 = carnivore

order-2)
The food chains and other such interrelationships in the ecosystems create a balanc e in the environment
that is called the ecological balance.
Man is also a part of these food chains and webs. However, man tries to modify the environment to suit
his needs unlike the other components of the ecosystem. This has upset the delicate balance being
maintained in the environment.
Figure 2: Forest Food Webs

For example: consider the food chain: plants, deer, tiger in a forest. There is a balance maintained in the
environment because of this food chain. This balance becomes evident when it is upset. If for some
reason, all the tigers disappear, then the deer population will increase to such an extent that plants will
reduce in number drastically and the habitat will bec ome unsuitable for other herbivores also with more
competition. If the deer disappear, then the tigers will starve and dwindle in number. And if the pl ants
disappear, then deer cannot survive and as a result the tigers also cannot survive.
Such an event in the earlier days has resulted in the creation of deserts such as Sahara in A frica and the
Thar des ert in Rajasthan. Due to hunting habits of man, the numbers of lions in Africa were drastically
reduced during the times of the Romans. This resulted in increased population of herbivores that in turn
adversely affected t he plant population. Less cover of veget ation on land led to desertific ation. Thus
maintenance of this ecological balance is very import ant.
Sustainable Development
The importance of maintaining the ec ological balance and conservation of the resources has been
increasingly becoming clear in the last two decades. It has now become necessary for all countries in the
world to recognize this fact and plan what is known as 'sustainable development'. The United Nations
World Commission of Environment and Development in 1987 has defined sustainable development as "a
process of change in which the exploitation of res ources, the direction of investments, the orientation of
technological development and the institutional change are in harmony and enhance both current and
future generations to meet their needs."
This means that t he requirements of the present generation in t erms of economic growth and community
development (to provide for basic needs like food, water, shelter, education, etc) are met without
compromising on environment al protection. This will ensure that every generation will leave clea n air,
water and soil resources for the future generations.
Methods to Enforce the Concept of Sustainable Development

 judiciously use the res ources that are available in plenty and maintain them without depletion or
pollution
 restrict the use of the already endangered resources and protect them from unsustainable
development.
 to increase awareness about the concept of sustainable development and ensure that the people
understand its full meaning. This concept means that there is a symbiotic relationship (mutually
beneficial) between the developmental process and environment protection. If environment
protection is ignored, then the very basis of developmental processes (the natural resources ) will
get exhausted which will spell doom for mankind. On the other hand, one cannot ignore
development and only t hink of environment al protection. However, it is necessary to strike a
balance bet ween the two.
Towards this end, every individual has to make his actions eco -friendly. This is possible only if man stops
thinking of himself as the supreme creation and enjoys only the benefits. It is high time man reali zes that
he is an integral part of the environment. He should also realize t hat because he is at the pinnacle of
evolution and has also more res ponsibility towards maintaining the environment.

Module 3.
ECONOMIC PLANNING

ECONOMIC PLANNI NG – refers to t hose activities concerned with uplifting the quality of life and
income levels of the population through assessment of advantages from economic activities in either
agriculture, industry, tourism, services, etc.
Factors to S tudy:
 Commerce
 Industry
 Tourism
 Agriculture
COMMERCE
1. Types of Commercial Areas

1. Cent ral Business District (CB D)
a. Major CB D – shopping, service area with largest dept & variety stores, specially shops,
business & professional services, hotels, theatres, etc.
b. Minor CBD – market as main feature (types: wholesale market, wet and dry market) ; quasi -
residential-commercial or mixed us e development.
2. Commercial Strip – extension of the CBD
3. Neighborhood Center – local source of staple & convenience goods and services built around
supermarket wit h convenience stores; population served: 7,500-20,000
Type s of Busi ness or Trade
1. Wholesale Trade – resale of new & used goods (w/o transformations) to retailers
a. Merchant wholesalers
b. Sales branches and sales offices
c. Assemblers, buyers, coops
2. Retail Trade – resale to the general public
a. Sale for personal/household consumption
b. Sale from displayed merchandise
c. Renting goods to general public; repair & installation services
3. Banking and Finance
4. Insuranc e
5. Real State
6. Service
a. Business services
b. Recreational services
c. Personal services
Classification of Commercial Areas

1. According to Characteristics
a. Location and Size
o The CBD is usually located in the oldest part of the cit y and has undergone several
periods of redevelopment
o The CB D typically grew toward the higher-income side of the region and discarded
space on the opposite side of the city

o Older, nineteenth century cities typically displayed very high density CBD core are as.
b. Cent rality
o The singular advantage of the CBD has been its centrality. The convergence of
transportation lines in the area and t he many activities that have evolved in response
traditionally made the CB D the center of action and prestige.
c. Daytime-Nighttime Contrasts
o Most activities take place during weekday business hours, except for the conventions,
entert ainment, and dining activities that primarily occur in the hotel district.
o In the evenings and on weekends, streets and sidewalks, along with business
themselves, are largely empty.
o Middle and upper-income citizens who come to the area day by day leave for the
suburbia in the off-hours
o Street vehicular traffic is typically quite heavy both day and night. But traffic at night is
far lighter that daytime volumes.
d. Population and Work Force Trends
o The Modern downtown business district is primarily a work center and has relatively
few permanent residents.
o The homeless constitute yet another important and growing segment of the downtown
population.
o The housing inventory in and around the cbd is old and blighted in many slow-growing
cities.
o The one family group most conspicuously absent from downtown housing in nearly all
cities is the middle class.
o CBDs remain the largest single center of employment in nearly every large
metropolitan area.
Advantages Offered by CBDs (All associated with centrality)

1. The downtown is generally the one place most easily reached by the entire city population
(accessibility).
2. Face-to-fac e cont act, direct, personal contract, which is very easy in the CDB, facilities
information flows, supplemented by electronic, telecommunication, and data processing
networks.
3. Transactional performance or work environment was also traditionally considered a benefit

associated with core locations due to proximity of many support pers onnel.
4. Readily available labor mark et.
5. Entertainment and spectator sports activity for leisure-time diversion are readily accessible in
the typical downtown.
6. Professional expertise in many discipline, including medical, legal, financial, governmental

and management, is often most readily available in the downtown.
7. Presence of money and credit mark et.
8. Access to high-order shopping facilities.

9. Educational opportunities, including university programs and facilities, commercial trade
schools, libraries, specialized bookstores and media centers, continue to cluster close to
downtown in many cities.
Functional Sub-areas of the CBD

1. Built-up core -- normally consists of a group of high -rise office buildings, a financial district, a
hotel-convention district
2. Frame – includes parking areas, convention/ent ertainment district, wholesale/warehouse

area, government cluster, medical area, public housing, skid row, and urban renewal zone.
Characteristics of the CBD Core

Factor Definition Characteristic
Intensive land us e Area of most intensive land- Multistoried buildings, highest retail
use and highest concent ration productivity per unit ground area, land use
of social and economic characterized by offices, retail sales,
activities within metropolitan consumer servic e, hotels, theaters and bank.
complex
Extended vertical Area of highest buildings Easily distinguishable by aerial observation,
scale within metropolitan complex elevator personnel linkages, grow vertically
rather horizontally.

Limited horizont al Horiz ontal dimensions limited Greatest horizontal dimension rarely more
scale by walking scale than one mile
Limited horizont al Horiz ontal movement minor Geared to walking scale. Very gradual
change and not signific antly affected horizontal change. Zone of assimilations and
by metropolitan population discards limited over a few blocks over long
distribution perio ds of time.
Conc entrated Area of greatest concent ration Location of highest concentration of foot
daytime population of daytime population within traffic. Absence of permanent residential
metropolitan complex population
Focus of intracity Single area of convergence of Major mass transit interchange location for
mass transit city mass transit system entire city.
Cent er of Focus of headquarters office Extensive use of office space for executive
specialized for business, government, and and policy-making functions. Center of
functions industrial activities specialized professional and business
services.
Internally Excluding natural boundaries, Pedestrian and personnel linkages between
conditioned CBD boundaries confined only establishments govern horizontal expansion.
boundaries by pedestrian scale of Dependency on mass transit inhibits lateral
distance expansion.
Characteristics of the CBD Frame

Factor Definition Characteristic
Semi-intensive land Area of most intensive non- Building height general to walk-up scales. Site
use retail land use outside CB D only partially built on.
core
Prominent Area of observable nodes of Sub foci characterized mainly mainly by

functional land utilization surrounding wholesaling with stocks, warehouse, off-street
subregions CBD core parking, automobile sales and servic es,
multifamily dwelling, intercity transportation
terminals and facilities, light manufacturing and
some institutional uses.
Extended horizont al Horiz ontal scale geared to Most establishment have off-street parking, and
scale accommodation of motor docking facilities, movements bet ween
vehicles and to handling of establishment are vehicular.
goods
Unlinked functional Activity nodes essentially Important establishment linkages to CBD core
subregions linked to areas outside CB D (e.g., intercity trans port ation terminals,
frame, except transportation warehousing) and to outlying urban regions
terminals (e.g., wholes ale distribution to suburban
shopping areas and to serve industries )
Externally Boundaries affected by Commercial us es generally limited to flat lands
conditioned natural barriers and growth tends to extend into areas of dilapidat ed
boundaries presence of large housing: CBD frame uses fill in int erstices of
homogeneous areas with central focus of highway and rail transportation
distinguishable int ernal routes.
linkages (e.g. residential
areas with schools,
shopping, and community
facilities)

Planning Process
Process Step/Details Analysi s Tool
A. Assessment of existing 1. Identification of data requirements & Data requirements,

situation sources sources, analysis
2. Data gat hering/collection
3. Data processing & analysis
B. Determination of B. 1. Determination of present needs Area needed for

development needs & a. Adequacy of existing comm’l service expansion = 0.015 x
presentation of centers proj. inc. in built-up
projected or future b. %age share of comm’l activities to area
scenarios municipal inc ome
c. efficiency of support facilities Rule of thumb: provide
B.2. Determination of future needs 1.5-3% of total
a. identification of activities requiring future built-up area for
expansion comm’l land use
b. determination of space requirement
B. 3. Identific ation of problems, ** Area requirement =
needs/demands area needed for
a. financing source future expansion –
b. manpower support facilities existing commercial
area
C. Formulation of goals Basis: locality’s comparative advantage or SWOT Analysis

and objectives commercial development Site selection criteria
(SMART - Specific, *Goals – broad & general
Measurable, *Objectives – more specific and tangible
Attainable, Realistic,
Time-Bounded)
D. Formulation of sectoral 1. Identify specific aspect of commercial

proposals & activity needing expansion/ development
recommendations 2. Identify possible loc ation
3. Formulate specific policies/strategies
* Policies – principles & rules of

actions/conditions governing pursuit of
goals & objectives
E. Implementation a. E. 1. Implementing mec hanisms

b. identify implementing agencies
c. define agency responsibilities
d. estimate program cost &
implementation schedule
e. E. 2. Monitoring mechanism
a. goals/obj reflective of locality’s
aspirations
b. policies followed vis-à-vis dev’t
projects
c. reporting system: planned & actual
project

Assessment of Existing Situation
Data requirements Source s Data utilization/Other details Analysi s tool
1. Current & projected pop’n Demography

per brgy Sector
2. Existing commercial est. & LGU; market Assess growth of commercial r=
support facilites services administrator; activity in t erms of rate of r – rate of
primary survey increase in no. of est. increase of est.
Consider infra support l1 – current no of
facilities private sector est.
investments; shopping trend l0 – previous no.
E valuate relationship bet of est.
commercial areas & ot her ll0 – no of yrs.
functional uses in terms of between current
area coverage compare land & previous
ratio of comm’l area with total
built-up area
Rule of thumb: provide 1.5-3%

of total built-up area for
comm’l land use
*Total built-up area –
contiguous grouping of ten
(10) or more structures
4. Employed persons 15
years old and over by major
occupation & industry group
5. Locality’s major source of Local
income administration
Site Selection Criteria

1. Site Selection Criteria for Commercial Area
a. The site must be located in the most desirable general area as established by the economic
survey.
b. The site must be owned or controlled by the developer, or offers the possibility of acquisition.
c. Land cost must be in keeping with overall economic consideration
d. Existing zoning must permit shopping center development or reasonable likelihood of

rezoning must exist;
e. The site must contain sufficient land to permit construction facilities to meet the sales
potential;
f. The land must be in one piece, free of interviewing roadways, right -of-way easements, major
waterways, or other obstacles that would force development in separated portions;
g. The topography and shape of the site must permit advantageous planning, and reasonable
construction;

h. The surrounding road pattern and accessibility must allow full utilization of the business
potential;
i. The structure must be visible from major thoroughfares;
j. The surrounding areas should be safeguarded against blight;
k. Retail facilities should be exposed to maximize foot traffic;
l. Various mechanized traffic types and foot traffic be separated and distinct from one another;
m. Maximum comfort and convenience for shoppers and merchants should be provided for and;
n. Orderliness, unity and beauty should be achieved.
2. Site Selection Criteria for a Market/Trading Sites or Trading Centers:

a. It should be in urbanized area;
b. There should be relativity developed economic and servicing activity, as well as an

established link with other key areas of the municipality.
c. It should be in strategic and convenient locations preferably along existing and proposed land
and other modes of transportation to facilitate communication and distribution of goods to
other areas dependent on this center for their shopping needs.
d. On the basis of market potentials it should be along major arteries and with more than one line
of access.
3. Parking and Loading Space Requirements

- It shall conform with RULE XI X (Parking and Loading Space Requirements) of the National
Building Code (NBC)
*** The location should be complementary with other functional areas in terms of s ervices and
convenient distance.
4. Recommended distances expressed in travel time on foot or kilometers

a. From residential zones to:
i. Neighborhood center - 750 meters or 15 minute travel time on foot (maximum)

ii. Minor CB D-12 kms. - Maximum walking distance, 15-30 minute travel time by public
transport service.
iii. Major CBD - 45 minutes to one-hour travel time from the farthest areas served by the
center by public or private trans port.
b. From rec reational zones to any shopping center - s hould be a minimum of 5 min. travel time
by public or private transport or 15 minutes travel time on foot.
c. From the education center (schools) – a minimum travel time of 15 minutes by public
transport/
d. From the health center ( hospital) – a minimum of 300 meters or 10 to 20 minute travel time.
e. From the police station – 5 minutes travel time

f. From the fire station – 3 to 5 minute travel time.
g. From the garbage or disposal area – 5 to 10 kms. Or 15 t o 20 minute travel time of garbage
truck.
INDUSTRY
CLASSIFICATION OF INDUSTRI ES
1. ACCORDING TO RES OURCE

 Resource-Oriented Industrie s. These are characterized by the large proportion of raw materials
value to total production value. They are located in areas where resources are available, thus
minimizing added cost to the transportation of raw materials.
 Market-Oriented Industrie s. These include processing which usually adds bulk and weight to the
products. Hence, distribution costs and other related problems are minimized if they are located near
marketing centers.
 Footloose Industrie s. These industries are second-stage users where processing cost of materials
count more than transfer costs. Thus, they are located where their linkages are greatest.
2. ACCORDING TO CAPITALIZATION
 Cottage Industry. An activity with total assets not exceeding P500,000.
 Small Scale Industrie s. Total assets should be P500,000 to P5,000,000.
 Medium Scale Industries. Total assets should be P5, 000, 000 to P20,000,000.
 Large Scale Industries. Total assets should be over P20 million.
3. ACCORDING TO HAZARD/RIS KS
 Hazardous Indu strie s. These are fire and health hazards. Non -haz ardous industries
discharge negligible amounts of combustible or toxic wastes.
 Pollutant Industrie s. These industries discharge large amounts of air, water or solid
pollutants. Pollutant industries emit little or negligible amounts of these pollutants.
Light. Non-pollutive / non-hazardous; non-pollutive / hazardous
Medium. Pollutive / non-hazardous; pollutive / hazardous
Heavy. Highly pollutive / non-hazardous; highly pollutive / hazardous; highly pollutive /
extremely hazardous
4. ACCORDING TO EMPLOYMENT SIZE

 Cottage Industries. Industries with an employment of less than 10 workers.
 Small Scale Industrie s. Industries with 10 to 99 employees.
 Medium Scale Industries. Industries with 100 to 199 employees.
 Large Scale Industries. Industries with 200 or more employees.
SITE SELECTION CRITERIA (INDUSTRY)

 Site should be fairly flat, not more than 5% in slope. Topography and land surface shape
must permit advantageous planning and reasonable construction.
 Soil and sub-soil condition should afford adequat e bearing capacity for economical
construction of buildings.
 Soil and sub-soil condition must be suitable for location , site preparation and utility
connection.

 Site is preferably agriculturally marginal.
 Site should be free from erosion.
 There must be good external surface drainage and internal soil drainage and free from
flooding hazard.
 Site should be accessible preferably to all weather road or rail facilities.
TOURISM
1. Development Standards and Guidelines:
A. Site Planning
a.1 Siting
- the detailed Site Development Plans for each of the resort areas and other proposed land
uses or areas in the Framework Plan must be submitted for review, evaluation and approval
by the Tourism Estate Department.
a.2 Grading and Clearing (site and beaches)
- must be done to preserve and enhance the special features such as hills, promotories, steep
banks, cliffs, rock formations, and similar land forms.
a.3 Beach Improvements
- It should be cleared of litter and ot her garbage. A swimming area may be provided by
clearing the identified site of rocks, dead corals, seaweeds, and other unsightly or dangerous
obstructions.
a.4 Setbacks and Buffer Zone s
a.4.1 Buffer Zone
- there shall be a minimum of 10-meter buffer zone, along the entire perimeter of each
of the clusters or tourism zones, and around the proposed golf course site.
a.4.2 Setbacks
1. Along t he Beach Front – any development along and adjacent to coastlines must
respect the beach’s natural function as an energy dissipation system which provides a
dynamic equilibrium and gives protection to the inland against storm surge.
- a mandatory beachfront easement along all coastal areas shall be defined at

30 meters from the edge of the beach zone inland perpendicular to t he
coastline.
2. Along the Green Areas – no structures shall be allowed to be built within 5 meters
from the edge of the green areas.
3. Distances between Structures

- for single storey units – the minimum setback should be 10 meters along
walls with openings; and at least 7 meters along wall without openings.
- for multi-storey units – at least 15 meters along wall wit hout openings.
a.5 Landscaping and Protection of Trees
- it shall be approved by the Tourism Estate Management Group.
a.6 Density Requirements
- the concept of GROSS DE NS ITY may be allowed. This would refer to t he total number of
rooms (double rooms) that will allowed to be built within a given resort zones or area.
- HIGH DENS ITY 60 to 80 rooms/hectare
- MEDIUM DE NS ITY 30 to 45 rooms/hectare
- LOW DENS ITY 10 to 15 rooms/hectare
a.7 Parking
- it should be located within 200-300 meters (maximum of 500 meters ) from the tourist
facilities.
a.8 Maintenance
- proper maintenance of facilities, gro unds, beach areas and other zones must be done on a
regular basis.
B. Utilities
b.1 Solid Waste Di sposal
- shall be sort ed. Biodegradable waste shall be deposited int o sanitary landfill areas in the
utility zone provided this is covered by soil immediately after disposal. Non-degradable waste
shall be brought to a selected site in land and incinerated or BAN/ CLEA N AIR ACT.
b.2 Sewage Treatment
Sewage disposal systems should be at a lower elevation from shallow wells and deep wells.
b.3 Water Supply
- shall be designed separat ely for domestic use and drinking purposes.
- quality of water for domestic use and drinking water quality shall strictly adhere to
the requirements of sampling, testing and treatment of the Water Code.
b.4 Drainage
- outlets for dirty wat er and storm water shall be provided for.
b.5 Fire Protection

- there shall be facilities for at least one fire truck and fire station.
- water hydrants shall be installed in accordance with design requirements.
- it shall be in accordance to the specifications of the Fire Code of the Philippines.
b.6 Communication
- there shall be at least one means of communication to the resort areas, whether by
telephone, radio communications or wireless telegraph.

Module 4.
SOCIAL PLANNING

SOCIAL PLANNI NG – refers to those activities concerned with planning, development, and management
of s ocial services, facilities required by specific population groups, community, town, city, province,
region, or nation.
Factors to S tudy:
 Demography
 Education
 Housing
 Healt h Services
 Social Welfare Services
 Protective Servic es
 Sports and Recreation
EDUCATION
1.1 Pre-school (Kindergarten Level)
a. School site must have a minimum lot area of 500 square meters. The area may be divided into a
minimum of 140 square meters for the classroom and 360 square meters for the playground. This
area is only good for not more than 4 classes.
b. 200 met ers walking distance from the school site.
c. Ideal class is size is 25-30 children per teacher. Class size may be increased to 30 -40 pupils per
teacher if there is a teacher aide.
d. Classroom size should be 1 ½ square met ers per child.
e. There should be at least one toilet seat for every 25 children at one time, preferably wit h separate
bathroom for boys and girls.
f. For a classroom 7 x 9 meters, there should be at least two fluorescent lamps and one wide
window and electric fans to allow cross ventilation.
1.2 Elementary and Secondary

a. The maximum distance for a pupil or student to walk from residenc e to school site is
three (3) kilometers, while t he maximum time from residence to school on board of public conveyance is
thirty (30) minutes.
b. Located beyond 200 met ers of plac es of ill repute, rec reational establishments of
questionable character, manufacturing and industrial plants or milit ary barracks.
c. The ground area occupied by school buildings and other structures should not exceed
40% of the school site.
Minimum standards for instructional and administrative spaces:

Classroom 1.40 sq.m. per place
Science Laboratory 2.10 sq.m. per place
Secondary School Shops
Practical Arts/Technology and Economics .50 sq.m. per place
Girls Trades/Homemaking 2.50 sq.m. per place
Wood Trades 5.00 sq.m. per place
Metal Trades 5.00 sq.m. per place
Mechanic al Trades 7.00 sq.m. per place
Electrical Trades 4.00 sq.m. per place

Drafting/Drawing 2.50 sq.m. per place

Farm Mechanics 5.00 sq.m. per place
Farm Machinery 6.50 sq.m. per place
Fish Capt ure/ Culture/ 2.50 sq.m. per place
Preservation
Admini strative and Service Spaces
Administrative Office 5.00 sq.m. per place

Medical/Dental Clinics 28.00 sq.m. gross
Guidance Room 28.00 sq.m. gross
Library/Learning Resource s Center
Capacity of 10% of the enrollment at 2.40 sq.m. per place, provide d that the total area is
not less than that of a standard classroom.
Corridors
Not required at ground level if appropriate access to enclosed spaces provided.
1.3. Colleges and Universities

1. The area of school site as a general rule will be as follows:
500 or less students 0.50 ha.
501 to 1,000 1.00 ha.
1,001 to 2,000 2.00 has.
2,001 to 3,000 3.00 has.
As a general rule, the same ration should be maint ained for enrollment in excess of 3,000.
For largest colleges and universities the campus should be at least 7.0 has. on the minimum
number of students which is 10,000.
The utilization of the 7.0 has., the regular open space minimum dimensional standard needed.
For any activity of the school is determined by multiplying a constant of 2.50 sq.m./student.
The minimum standard for indoor facility is multiplied by a constant of 0. 90 sq.m. to the total number
of students.
HOUSING
Refer to Standards for PD 957 and BP 220. (CD Companion)

HEALTH
1. Health Care Facilities
Suggested area/site requirement for hospit als:
Capacity Area
25 bed capacity 1.5 has.
 Rural Health Unit Personnel Standards:
1 municipal healt h officer per 20,000 population
1 public health nurse per 20,000 population
1 rural sanitary inspector per 20,000 population
1 rural health midwife per 5,000 or 3,000 population
depending on the terrain of the locality
Acce ssi bility Parameters
1. Proposed site is at least 35-kms. away from an existing government hospital facility.
2. Proposed site is less than 35 kms. away from an existing government hospital facility but more
than 3-hours travel by the usual means of transportation for the most part of the year.
3. Proposed site is less than 35-kms. away from an existing government hospital facility and less
than 3-hours travel time by the usual means of transportation.
Catchment Population Parameters
1. Catchment population is at least 75,000 and accessible as a referral activit y to at least 3 HRU or
main health center.
2. Catchment population is less than 75, 000 but more than 25,000.
3. Catchment population is less than 25, 000.

Distance/ : >/= to : <than 35 kms. : < than 35 kms.
Population : 35 kms. : >/= to 3 hrs. travel time : < than 3-hrs. travel time
>75,000 : District : Municipal : RHU Infirmary
<75,000 but >25,000 : Municipal : Extension : none
Less than 25, 000 : Extension :RHU infirmary : none
Clinical Service Facilities

_____________________________________________________
Nomenclature : Clinical Service Category : Usual No. of Beds
______________________________________________________
BHS – RHU Sub-system
______________________________________________________
Bgy. Health Station : Primary : none
Rural Health Unit : Primary : none
RHU Infirmary : Primary : 5-10
______________________________________________________
Hospital Sub-system
____________________________________________________
Extension Hospit al : Primary capability/ : 10
: Secondary facility :
: :
Municipal Hospital : Secondary : 10 – 25
: :
District Hospital : Secondary : 25 – 75
: :
Provincial/Gen.Hos. : Tertiary : 100 – 250
: :
Regional : Teaching-Training : 300 – 500
______________________________________________________
Hospital Sub-system
____________________________________________________
Extension Hospit al : Primary capability/ : 10
: Secondary facility :
: :
Municipal Hospital : Secondary : 10 – 25
: :
District Hospital : Secondary : 25 – 75
: :
Provincial/Gen.Hos. : Tertiary : 100 – 250
: :
Regional : Teaching-Training : 300 – 500
HEALTH S ECTOR – Normal Hours
Municipal Health Officer (MHO) = 4 hours for direct patient care and 4 hours for administrative/auxiliary
time
Public Health Nurse (P HN) = 5 hours for direct patient care and 3 hours for administrative/auxiliary
time

Rural Health Midwife (RHM) = 6 hours for direct patient care and 2 hours for administrative/auxiliary
time
Rural Sanitary Inspector = 6 hours for direct patient care and 2 hours for administrative/auxiliary
work
Dentist = 5 hours for direct patient care and 3 hours for administrative/auxiliary
time
- the frequency of clinic visit for consultation is assumed to be 2.88 times. The duration of each
consultation is about 15 minutes, more or less, depending on the type of disease.
Sample computation for manpower determination for out-patient care:
Given:
cases of Gastro Ent eritis = 100,000
a patient will seek consultation = 2 times
physicians time (duration in minutes) = 15 minut es
physician’s productive time = 4 hours
working days in one year = 272
Solution:
man-hour required = (no. of cases) x (frequency of visit) x (physician’s time

60 minut es/hour
= 100,000 x 2 x 15
60
= 50,000 man-hours required for out-patient
Professional time= (working days in one year) x (physi cian’s productive time)
= 272 x 4
= 1,088 hours (professional time in hours)
no. of manpower = no. of man-hours required for out-patient

professional time in hours
= 50,000
1,088
= 46 MHO
b.2 For Rural Health Units (RHUs)
- it is computed based on the setting pattern of rural health units as required by the law.
- eight (8) RHU categories considered depending on the population bracket.

- MHO who is later designated as a rural health physician
- Public Health Nurse (P HN)
- Rural Health Midwife (RHM)
- Rural Sanit ary Inspector (RS I)
b.2.2 Standards in RHU Personnel Population
 One (1) Municipal Healt h Officer (MHO) per 20,000 population
 One (1) Public Healt h Nurs e (PHN) per 20,000 population
 One (1) Rural Sanitary Inspector (RSI) per 20, 000 population
 One (1) Rural Health Mid-wife (RHM) per 5,000 population
c. Services/Facilities Requirement
c.1 Hospital B ed Requirement – t wo methods are used in determining the hospital bed requirements
namely, the expected patient-load approac h and the normative approach.
c.1.1 Principal Methods:
-patients suffering from acute communicable diseases would need an average seven (7) days
hospitalization.
-patients with chronic degenerative diseases would need an average of fift een (15) days
hospitalization.
c.1.2 Second Methods:
- utilizes normative approach whereby a bed population ratio of one is to t wo thousand (1:2,000)
is used to determine the bed requirement.
Suggested Bed Requirement by Facility Type:
Municipal Hospital = 6 to 24 beds
Provincial Hospital = 100 to 199 beds
Regional Hos pital = 200 to 299 beds
Medical Centers = 300 and over
d. Criteria for Establi shing a New Hospital (Gov’ t)
 The proposed hospital is at least thirty five (35) kilometers away from any existing government
hospital.
 The hos pital will be accessible as a referral facility to a minimum of three (3) RHU or main health
center facilities in the catchment area.
 The permanent population to be served within the catchment area is at least 75,000 population.

 In the case of island municipalities or inaccessible areas due to mount ainous terrain or
geographic barriers, the following shall apply:
- The catchment population shall be at least 25,000 or more
- The area shall be at least 3 hours away by the usual means of transportation
Standard Area per Hospital/Clinic:
Municipal Hospital = 1.5 has.
Provincial Hospital = 1.5 has.
Regional Hos pital = 2.5 has.
Medical Center = 3.5 has.
e. Solid Waste Di sposal – the following guidelines:
e.1 Area - space requirement for a dumpsite.
- Metro Manila showed the following pre capita solid waste generation:
e.1.1 Per capita generation - 0.32 kg./day
e.1.2 A verage in Met ro Manila - 0.40 kg./day
e.1.3 Range - 0.23 to 0.60 kg./day
3
- on the basis of 0.40/day with a density of 500 kg./m in the fill and 20% cover, hectare-meter per year of
dumping ground will provide for a population of about 30,000.
For any number of population, the required area can be calculated as follows:
number of population
Area required (has.) = -----------------------------------------------------
30,000 people per hectare-meter/year
e.2 Site Criteria for Dump Site and Sanitary Land Fill
e.2.1 Topography
- Dump site and sanitary landfill sites shall preferably lie on flat or gently rolling area that is not
subject to flooding. Ravines or c anyon can accommodate a great volume of waste but my require special
measures to control the surface run-off.
e.2.2 Soil

- soil types that provide good drainage can better allow decomposition of waste mat erials than
those with poor drainage characteristics.
e.2.3 Location (Ba sed on Sanitation Code of the Phil.)
- a dump site shall not be closer than 50 meters from waterways or any surface water resources,
aquifer or ground water res ervoir, and not be located within a wat ershed area.
e.2.4 Acce ssibility
- dumpsite or incinerator shall not be within any functional area of the city/municipality but it must
be accessible from collection points.
e.2.5 Facility Requirements
e.2.5.1 Acce ss Reads
- dump site or incinerat or facility should be accessible from collection point through all
weat her read.
e.2.5.2 Fence
- to minimize __ and spread of ___, a dump site shall be enclosed by a perimeter fence
made or durable mat erials.
e.2.5.3 Lighting of Incinerator Facility
- incinerator installation shall be well lighted to ensure safety of operation.
f. Cemeteries/Burial Grounds
- below is the procedure on how to compute the future area requirement for
cemeteries/burial grounds.
f.1 Consi der the number of death certificates. This would indicate the number of deat hs within the
municipality. Compute the crude death rate by:
number of deaths x 1,000

Crude death rate = ---------------------------------------
population
Example:
1990 or 1995 population= 20,000
number of deaths = 500
500 x 1,000
CDR = -----------------
20,000
CDR = 25% per 1,000 population
f.2 Using the crude death rate, project the number of deaths by multiplying it to the number of projected
population. Then divide the product by 1,000.
CDR x Population
Projected Number of deaths = ---------------------------
1,000

Example:
For municipality with 22, 000 population.
Projected Number of Deaths = 25 x 22,000
-----------------
1,000
Projected Number of Deaths = 550
Location criteria/guidelines for cemeteries:
Criteria
As per PD 856 (Sanitation Code of the Phil.) burial grounds cemeteries, memorial parks, or any place
duly authorized by the government for permanent disposal of the dead should be:
1.1 -- At least twenty (20) meters distance from any dwelling unit, and no house shall be constructed
within the same distance from any burial ground.
1.2 -- Fifty (50) meters distance from either side of the river of fifty (50) meters distance from any source
of water supply.
2 Other Considerations (See rules and regulations for memorial parks)
2.1 No burial ground shall be located in an area with high water table, recharged aquifers, water bearing
rocks or where soil permeability is good.
2.2 – Cemeteries are preferably designed in sparsely populated areas but not outside city/municipality
limits or on the periphery of the town proper and away from the city/municipal water system.
2.3 – Cemeteries are preferably located on grounds free from flood hazards.
2.4 – A new cemetery should also be so loc ated so as to avoid distracting the opening of fut ure streets
and arterial grounds
2.5 – Cemeteries should not be where it may int erfere with the watershed of lakes or streams , which may
be needed for water supply.
3 – Consider the number of burials within the city/municipality. Compare the number of deaths and the
number of burial permits. The difference is equivalent to the number of burials outside the
city/municipality.
4 – A dd t he number of burials outside the municipality to the number of cremations, if any. Subt ract from
the sum from the number of deat hs. The result is the number of deaths burials outside the
city/municipality.
Definition of Term s
1. Epidemic – refers to the occurrence in a community or region of cases of an illness clearly in excess of
expectancy.
-expectancy varies wit h the nature of disease, its mode of transmission, and
community characteristics among other things.
- relative to the usual frequency of the disease in the same area, among the specific populations, and at
the same season of the year.

2. Pestilence – refers to an epidemic causing high mortality.
- mortality will be deemed high depending on the prevailing expectancy in the affected
community vis-à-vis the community at large, nature of illness, and ot her epidemiological factors.
3. Widespread Public Health Dangers – refers to situations applicable:
3.1 -in calamity areas;
3.2 -to a displaced population such as, but not limited to thos e in evac uation center and those
trapped in areas of armed conflict;
3.3 -to municipalities, cities, provinces, or regions where one or more dis ease outbreaks occurred
within a one-year period that threat en to reach epidemic proportions; or
3.4 –t o LGUs found t o have an inadequate health care system as indicat ed by the low coverage
of immunization of children under one year of age, high incidence of second and third degree malnutrition
among the children under years of age, or a larger portion of the local households having no access to
safe water supply or no sanitary toilet facilities.
Location Criteria/Guidelines for the Different Hospitals and Health Facilities
A. Rural Health Units
A.1 Barangay Health Station (B HS) – is the initial unit which dispense basic health care
- rec ommended service zone is from three (3) t o five (5) kilometers considering transport
availability for both the patient and medical staff and serving a population of 5,000.
A.2 Main Health Center (MHC) – engages in a broad range of activities covering mostly referrals
from the BHS and the preventive, promotive and curative aspects of health care.
- under the administrative and technical supervision of the Provincial Health Office.
B. City Health Center
- renders the same services as that of the Main Health Center but under the
administrative and technical supervision of the City Health Office.
Main Health Center and City Health should be guided by the following considerations:
B.1 Every municipality should have at least one MHC/CHC (for every 50,000 population)
B.2 Planned within the context of the poblacion;
B.2.1 the use of MHC/CHC will be optimized if the site is close to the market center;
B.2.2 it should be accessible to major roads and bus routes;
B.2.3 it should be located in areas with no obnoxious smells, noise or hazardous traffic condition;
and
B.2.4 it should be free from flood dangers; sub-soil condition must be acceptable.

C. Municipal Hospital – has a service zone with a radius of approximately thirty (30) kilometers. It should
be loc ated in settlements not provided with hospital s ervices, thus, serving as local gravit ation points and
socio-economic centers.
D. Secondary Care Di strict Hospital – provides definitive c are in the four (4) basic specialties, namely:
medicine, surgery, obnet rics, gynecology and pediatrics.
E. Tertiary Care Provincial Hospital – usually located in the regional cent er and offers more services than
a provincial hospital.
G. Medical Cent er – offers special care beyond the capabilities of Regional Hospital. This center provides
opportunities for training teaching and research in the medical field.
H. Government Hospital – operated and maintained partially or wholly by the National, Provincial,
Municipal or City Government or ot her political subdivision, board or other agency.
I. Private Hospital – owned, established and operated with funds raised or contributed t hrough donations,
or by private capital or other means by private individuals, association, corporation, religious
organizations, from company or joint stock association.
J. General Hospital – provides services for all kinds of illnesses, disease, injuries or deformities.
K. Special Hospital – provides servic es for one particular kind of illness/disease or health medical care
need.
L. Teaching and Training Hospital – fully departmentalized hospit al with accredited residency training
program in a specified specially or discipline.
SOCIAL WELFARE SERVICES
One Day Care Cent er per Barangay per RA 6972
One Senior Citizen Care Center per RA 7876
Mendicants – DSWD’s Primary Targets.
Minimum Area of 500 sq.meters for Senior Citizen Care Center
Minimum A rea requirement for Day Care Center – 2 sq. meters per 3 children, indoor and 1 sq.meter per
child, outdoor
Day Care Center Legal Basi s
RA 6972 – entitled “A n Act Establishing a Day Care Center in E very Barangay. Instituting Therein a Total
Development and Protection of Children Program. Appropriating Funds Therefore, and For Other
Purposes”, defend the right of children to assistance, including proper care and nutrition and to provide
them with special protection against all forms of neglect, abuse, cruelty and exploitation.
As defined in RA 7876, Day Care Service - is the provision of supplemental parental care to a o to 6 year
old child m ay be neglected, abased, exploited or abandoned during part of the day when parents cannot
attend to his needs.

SUB-SECTOR STANDARD LEGAL REMARKS
REQUIREMENTS BASIS
Social Servic es • One (1) Day Care Center per RA 6972 Eligible for Day Care Servic es
500 families
Day Care • Those who are below 6 years
Conditions old
• Majority of parents are both • Those whose parents are
working unable or incapable to care for
them under any of the ff.
• The community has no form
circumstances.
of socialization (no social
activities ) 1. One or both parents work
and no responsible adult is left
• Plenty of street children ages
to look after the children.
3 to 6
• Emotionally unprepared 2. mother, spend most of their

parents time caring for younger
children and doing household
• The community is willing to
chores
put up day care center
3. Parents are emotionally
unprepared for parenthood,
thus cannot take care of their
children
4. Parents are ill
5. With impatient, abusive and
neglectful parents or
caretaker.
6. Parents who have younger
children needing personal
attention.
• those who lack opportunities
for intellectual and social
stimulation
• those who have no relatives,
neighbors and other suitable
arrangements for substitute
parental care at home
• those who are withdrawn or
with
Senior Citizen 2 sq.m. per 3 children indoor RA 6972 some handicaps and can be
Care Center and 1 sq.m. per child outdoor helped by group experiences
Rule III, RA
500sq.m. 7876 • those who although
malnourished are free from
communicable diseases
Other criteria in admitting
children in Day Care Center:

1. The child should be 3 to 6
years old.
2. The child does not need a
lot of individual attention when
toileting.
3. The child should be
physically able to engage in
activit es.
PROTECTIVE SERVICES
RA 7160 – Local Government Code of 1991
SUB- STANDARD LEGAL

SECTOR REQUIREMENTS BASIS REMARKS
Protective 1 policeman per 500 Section 27 The urban areas shall have a higher
Services persons (Ideal Police-to- (RA 6975) minimum police-to population ratio as maybe
Population Ratio) prescribed by regulations.
Police Chapter IV,
Force 1 policeman per 1000 Section 55- • A fire station is headed by a
persons (Minimum 56 (RA city/municipal Fire Mars hall
Fire
Standard Police-to- 6975)
Station
Population Ratio)
One (1) Fire Station per
city/municipality with
adequate
Jail personnel, firefighting Chapter V, • In case of large cities/municipalities,

Services facilities/equipment Section 62- a district office with subordinate fire
63 (RA stations headed by a district fire
One (1) City or Municipal
6975) marshall maybe organized as
Jail
necessary.
• The LGU shall, however, provide the
necessary land or site of the station.
A city/municipal jail is headed by a city/mun.
jail warden. In case of large cities/mun. a
district jail with subordinate Jails headed by a
district jail warden may be established as
necessary

CLASSIFICATION OF POLI CE STATIONS BY POPULATION
(Napolcom Resolution No. 92-36)
TYP E
Component Cities Population

“A” 100,000 and above
“B” 75,000 to less than 100, 000
“C” less than 75,000
Municipal Police Stations:
“A” 75,000 or more
“B” 30,000 to less than 75,000
“C” less than 30,000
STANDARD LOT REQUI REMENTS
USER LOT AREA (SQM)

Police Station Ty pe “A” 2,500.00
Police Station Ty pe “B” 600.00
Police Station Ty pe “C” 400.00
Regional Command 80,000.00
Provincial Command 8,000.00
Mobile Force Coy 500.00
PNP List of Standard Plan
Buildings Area
Standard Police Station Type “A” 972.00 sq. m.
Standard Police Station Type “B” 200.00 sq. m.
Standard Police Station Type “C” 135.00 sq. m.
SPORTS AND RECREATION

Minimum of 500 sq.m. meters per 1,000 population for city and municipal park.
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
Active Rec reation – activities include hiking, tennis, basketball, swimming, fencing, golf, horseback riding,
jogging, sailing, etc.
City/Municipality – it is developed to serve the population of a town or a municipality. Its location is

recommended to be at the municipality’s outskirts for both passive and active recreation.
Coliseum – consist of multi-purpose court surrounded by a big spectator’s gallery all roofed over. The
court may be used for basketball, indoor tennis, boxing and similar indoor sports, as well as non-sporting
activities.
Gymnasium – generally smaller than a coliseum, it serves the athletic needs of most educational
institutions. Primarily used for physical educ ation activities as well as for public assembly. It may have
minimal spectator’s gallery or none at all.
Neighborhood Park – primarily made of passive recreation. This should be provided for each
neighborhood and usually wit h open lawn areas, planting and walks. Sculptural form and pools are
considered as ornaments. Its size normally requires about 1.2 to hectares

Neighborhood Playground – this is designed t o serve children under 14 years of age and may have
additional interesting feat ures to attract teeners and adults. Its location is in some neighborhood park -
school.
Parks and Playgrounds – is a type of center piece open space which may range from neighborhood to
city/municipality park which cater to t he recreational needs of t he residents of the community. That potion
of the subdivision which is generally not built in and intended for passive or active recreation.
Passive Recreation – are activities like nature study, strolling/walking for pleasure, picnicking, playing
chess, cards, etc, seeing movies and other spectacular shows.
Play lot – a safe rec reation and play areas designed for the pre-school children. It is usually located in
densely populated areas with high concentration of pre-school age group and with a service radius of
0.25 kms. from every home and commonly located on playground sites.
Privat e Facilities – refers t o both commercial and institutional/organized facilities which are operated and
managed by entrepreneurs for economic gains.
Public Facilities – are those administered and funded solely by a government (public) agency. It is non-
profit institution and use of
of facilities are free and/or fee is charged for is maintenance.
Recreation – is the refreshment of body and/or mind during one’s leisure hours.
Sports – is an occupation that constitutes a diversion or it is a form of recreation with formal

arrangement/agreement for completion.
Sports Center – contains the basic features of stadium and in addition has a swimming pool or auditorium
and other facilities for outdoor s ports. It must also have a small multi-purpose gymnasium but no or
minimal space for spectators.
Sports Complex – contains the basic features of a sport center, but in addition, it has a gymnasium with
ample space allotted to spectator’s gallery. It must also have training and housing facilities for athletes.
Sports Field – any open area distinctly devoted to sports activities. An open -air t rack and field, an outdoor
grandstand, a basketball court may belong under this category. It is usually provided with appropriate
lighting facilities.
Stadium – consists of a tract oval t he c enter of which may be used for baseball, softball soccer. In
addition, it must have a complementary grandstand and spectator’s gallery.
Athletic Field – the allocation of external space for the athletic field should allow adequate provision for
the laying out of the following basic components, among others:
a. A standard oval tract with a distance of 400 meters.
b. A baseball diamond with sides measuring 27.4 meters (90ft.) long.
c. A softball diamond with sides measuring 18.2 meters (60 ft.) long
d. A soccer football field with measuring 90-120 meters (100-130 yards) long and 45-90 meters
(50-100 yards) wide.

e. A basketball court which should be a flat, hard not grass surfac e measuring 26 x 14 meters (85
x 46 feet ).
f. A volleyball court measuring 18 m eters long and 9 meters wide (60 x 30 feet)
g. A lawn t ennis courts measuring 23. 77 meters long and 8.23 meters wide (73 x 27 feet), which
is the standard for singles. For doubles, a wider court is used, 10.97 meters (36 feet) wide.
h. Perimeter space should also be provided for the construction of a grandstand or grandstands
and bleachers.
Standard for Recreational Facilities
Space Requirement Ideal Size of Space Recreational Area

for Activity per Required for Wherein Activity may be
Type s of Activity Program Acti vity Located
Active Recreation Playground neighborhood
Children’s play area 0.2 has./1,000 pop. 0.4 parks, community parks,
Field play areas for young school grounds
children 0.6 has./1,000 pop. 1.2 -do-
Older-adult 0.6 has./1,000 pop. 0.8 Playfield community
Field Sports Activities: park/district park
Tennis-outdoor basketball Playfield Community Park
other court 4.0 has./5,000 pop. 0.8
Swimming L-outdoor pool/2,500 Competition -do-
Major boating activities pop. size/wading pool District park regional park
Hiking/camping/ 40.5 has./50,000 pop. 40.5 and over on reservation
horseback riding/nat ure 4.0 has./1,000 pop. 202-104 has. Large district park
study 1-18 hole 48 has. regional park
Golfing course/50,000 pop. Varies Community park , district
1.6 has./1,000 pop. Varies park
Passive Rec reation: 40.50 has. All parks
1. Picnicking varies Community parks/special
2. Passive water sports One lake/lagoon/ regional reservation
3. Zoos 25,000 pop. Lane district parks and
0.4 has./1,000 pop. special facilities
Lane district parks or
special facilities.
Others: 0.4 has./1,000 pop. 48 has. Community district and
1. Parking at 0.4 has./10,000 pop. regional parks
recreation area Community park
2. Land of
recreation center
Sports and Recreation:
1. A minimum of 500 sqm. per 1,000 population for municipal park.
2. A minimum of o.5 hectares per 1, 000 population for play field athletic field.
Standards for Parks, Playgrounds and Open Spaces
Category Population Per Unit Areas in Hectare
Playlot 500 0.25

Children’s Park 2,000 0.20

Neighborhood Playground 1,000 0.20
Neighborhood Park 5,000 0.80
District Park 25,000 5.00
Regional Park 100,000 40.00
Standard for Recreational Areas
Type of Area Hectares per 1,000 Size of Site Radius of

Population Ideal Minimum Area Served
Playground 0.6 1.6 0.8 has. 0.8 has.
Neighborhood Parks 0.8 4.0 0.8 has. 0.8
Playfield 0.6 6.0 2.4 has. 2.4
Community Parks 1.4 40.0 3.0 has. 3.0
Districts Parks 0.8 80.0 4.8 has. 4.8
Regional Parks and 6.0 204.0 -404.0 16.0 has. 16.0
Recreational

Module 5.
PLANNING LAW AND
ADMINISTRATION

PD 1308 “LAW REGULATING THE E NVIRONMENTAL PLANNING
PROFESSION IN THE P HILIPPINES”
P. D. 1308: ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNI NG PRACTICE (March 2, 1977)
Definition of Terms
 Environmental Planning – activities concerned with the management and development of land,
as well as, the preservation, conservation, and rehabilitation of the human environment.
 Environmental Planner – a person engaged in the practice of environmental planning and duly
registered with the Board of Environmental Planning in the manner herein provided.
Scope of Practice
Professional services in the form of technical consultation, plan preparation, and/or implementation
involving the following:
 Development of a community, town, city, or region;
 Development of a site for a particular need such as housing, centers for activities concerned with
research, education, culture, recreation, or government, industrial estates, agriculture, and w ater
resources, including a spatial arrangement of buildings, utilities and communication routes;
 Land use and zoning plans for the management and development, preservation, conservation,
rehabilitation, and control of the environment; and
 Pre-investment, pre-feasibility, and feasibility studies.
The Board of Environmental Planning

Composi tion – Chairman and two (2) members appointed by the President of t he Philippines among
those recommended by the Philippine Institute of Environmental Planners (P IEP).
Tenure - Three (3) years after their appointment until their successors shall have been appointed and
shall have duly qualified.
Qualification of Board Members
 A citizen and resident of the Philippines;
 At least thirty (30) years of age and of good moral c haracter;
 A holder of an environment planning degree or its equivalent from a rec ognized and legally
constituted institution if higher learning and with at least three (3) years of practical experience in
environmental planning.
 A registered environmental planner duly qualified to practice environmental planning in the

Philippines.
Causes for Removal from Officer
 Neglect of duty,

 Incompetence,
 Malpractice,
 Unprofessional, unethical, immoral, or dishonorable conduct
after having been given the opportunity to defend himself in a proper administrative investigation.
Powers and Functions of the Board
 Issue certificates of registration for the practice of environmental planning and suspend or revolve
the same for causes provided herein;
 Issue certificates of recognition to environmental planners already registered under this Decree
for specialized training.
 Approve registration without examination and the issuance of the corresponding certificates of
registration, in accordance with this Decree.
 Determine and prepare the cont ents of the licensure examinations; score and rate the
examination papers and submit the results .
 Adopt a Code of Ethics in the practice of environment al planning.
 Adopt an official seal to aut henticate its official doc uments.
 Inspect, in coordination with the Department of Education and Culture, at least once a year,
educational institutions offering courses in environmental planning in the P hilippines to ensure
that these institutions maintain a high standard of planning education.
 Look, from time t o time, into the conditions affecting the practice of environmental planning
profession and adopt measures necessary for the enhanc ement of the environmental planning
profession.
 Investigat e violations of this Decree and the rules and regulations there under as may come to its
knowledge and, for this purpose.
 Delegate the conduct of hearing or investigation of administrative cases filed before the Board.
 Promulgate decisions on such administrative cases subject to review by the commission.
 Issue, with the approval of the Commission, such rules and regulations as may be deemed
necessary to carry out the provisions of this this Decree; and
 Discharge such ot her powers and duties as may affect professional, ethical and technological
standards of the environmental planning profession in the Philippines.
Fees and Compensation of the Board
The B oard shall charge for eac h application the sum of one hundred pesos (P100.00) upon filing
of said application, and for registration purposes, the amount of fifty pesos (P50.00) payable to
the collecting and disbursing officer of the Commission.

Each member of the Board, whether a government employee or not, shall receive a compensation of
twenty-five pesos (P 25.00) for each applicant examined or registered wit hout examination.
All authorized expenses of the Board, including the compensation provided for herein, shall be paid by
the collecting and the disbursing officer of the Commission out of suc h appropriation as may be made for
the purpose.
Annual Report
The board shall, at the end of each calendar year, submit to the Commission a detailed report of its
activities and proceedings during the year embodying also such recommendations as it may deem proper
to promote the policies and objectives of this Decree.
o Registration Required - No person shall practice or offer to practice environmental planning in the
Philippines without having obtained the proper certificate of registration from the Board.
o Examination Requirements – except as otherwise permitted under Section 13 of this Title, all
applicants for registration for the practice of environmental planning shall be required to pass the
required professional examination as herein provided.
Registration Without Examination

Section13 of PD 1308
A certificate of registration for environmental planners shall be issued to any applicant by the Board first
constituted, without requiring the passing of the examination herein prescribed: Provided, That he
registers wit hin one (1) year after the constitution of the said Bo ard and that he possesses the following
qualifications :
 He must be at least twenty-one (21) years of age;
 He must be a Filipino citizen;
 He must be currently involved in the practice of environmental planning; and
 He must have any of the following academic and/or training background or experience.
1. Masteral degree in environmental planning, city and regional planning, or town and count ry
planning or its equivalent from a school recognized by the government.
2. Masteral degree in a field of discipline related to planning such as architecture, civil

engineering, geography, economics, public administration, or sociology.
3. Masteral degree in a field of discipline relat ed to planning, ot her than those listed in
paragraph (2) above, plus two (2) years of environmental planning experience, and either of
the following additional qualifications:
a. Completion of at least eighteen units of graduate course work in environmental

planning;
b. Completion of a training program or program t he tot al number of hours of which is

equivalent to the number of graduate course work in environmental planning.
4. Bachelor’s degree in environment al planning, city and regional planning, or town and count ry
planning from school or institution recognized by the Government.

5. Bachelor’s degree in a field of discipline related to planning such as architecture, civil
engineering, geography, economics, public administration, or sociology.
6. Bachelor’s degree in a field of discipline related to planning, other than those listed in
paragraph (5) above, plus eighteen (18) graduate units in planning.
7. Civil service eligibility in planning or city planning, plus five y ears of environmental planning
experience.
Registration With Examination

Sections 14 - 16 of PD 1308
Holding of Examination
 Examination for candidates desiring to practice environmental planning in the P hilippines shall be
given onc e a year in Metro Manila at such dat es to be determined by the Commission.
Subjects of Examination
 Applicants for certificates of registration as environmental planners shall be ex amined on

comprehensive plan preparation including the following subjects:
a. Physical planning, such as zoning, land use and water resources studies; analysis of
micro-climate, vegetation, topography, soil conditions, ecological and geologic al
conditions.
b. Social planning, such as the sociological, anthropological and demographic aspects and
requirements of planning.
c. Economic planning, such as economic res ourc e analysis, assessment of economic

facilities, industrial siting, determination of labor and transport requirements of industries,
analysis of statistical information and economic linkages among different economic
activities, etc.;
d. Planning law and administration, such as organization & administration of a planning

agency, preparation of cases in planning & zoning litigations, public policy instruments,
professional practice, laws and ethics, & standard rules and regulations, etc.;
e. Special planning studies, project planning, pre -investment and feasibility studies, etc.
Qualifications for Examination
 A citizen of the Philippines;
 At least twenty-one (21) years of age; and
 A holder of any of the following:
 Masteral degree in environmental planning, city and regional planning, or t own and
country planning, or its equivalent acceptable to the Board;
 Bachelor’s degree in environmental planning, city and regional planning, or t own and
country planning.

 Masteral degree in either architecture, civil engineering, economics, public administration
or sociology.
 Bachelor’s degree in either architecture, civil engineering, economics, public

administration, or sociology, and with two (2) years of environment al planning ex perience
certified by a registered environmental planner.
Refusal to Issue Certificate
The B oard shall not issue a certific ate of registration to any person who s uffers from any of t he following
disqualifications
 Conviction by a court of competent jurisdiction of any criminal offense involving moral turpitude;
 Conviction in an administrative case of any offense involving immoralit y or notoriously

undesirable conduct;
 Has unsound mind. In case of refusal to issue a certificate, the Board shall issue to the applicant
a written statement setting forth the reason for such action.
Oath of Environmental Planners
 Successful candidates in the examination shall take the prescribed professional oath before the
Board or before any other government official authorized to administer such oath prior to entering
the practice of the profession.
Planning Services by a Registered Environmental Pla nner.
 It shall be unlawful for any person to render planning services as defined in S ection 3 unless the
plans, designs and programs have been prepared under, and signed and sealed by a registered
environmental planner.
 It shall be unlawful for any environmental planner to sign his name, affix his seal, or use any other
method of signat ure on plans, specifications or ot her documents prepared by another
environmental planner or made under the supervision of another environmental planner.
 It shall likewise be unlawful for any person, except the environmental planner in charge, to sign
for any branch of the work, or any function on environmental planning practice, not actually
performed by him. The environmental planner in charge shall be fully responsible fo r all plans,
specifications and other documents issued under his seal or authorized signature.
 It shall be unlawful for any person, without the written consent of the environmental planner or
author of said documents, to amend, revise, duplicate or make c opies of said documents for use
in the repetition of and for ot her projects whether executed partly or in whole.
Requirements for a Consul ting Firm, Partnership, Company Corporation or Association to Engage
in Environmental Planning Practice
 Registered as such with the Board and approved by the P RC to engage in the practice of
environmental planning in the Philippines.
 At least seventy-five (75) percent of the entire membership of the Board of the corporation,
partnership, firm or association shall be registered environmental planners and at least seventy-
five (75) percent of the total capitalization of the said entity is owned by them; and

 The practice of the consulting firm, partnership, c ompany, corporation, or association in
environmental planning shall be carried out by duly registered environmental planners.
Roster of Environmental Planners
 Roster showing the names and plac es of business of all registered environmental planners or of
those holding Certificates of Recognition along special branches of environmental planning, shall
be prepared and kept by the Board and by the Secretary of the Commission.
Suspension and Revocation of Certifi cates
 Subject to the approval of the Commission, the Board shall have the power, after due notice and
hearing, to suspend or revoke t he certificate of registration for any cause mentioned in Section
19.
Re-i ssuance and Replacement of Certificate
 The Board may, after the expiration of one (1) year from the date a certificate of registration is
revoked and for valid reasons, entertain an application for the issuance of a new certificat e of
registration.
Use of Seal
Registered environment al planners shall obt ain a seal of such design as the Board shall authorize and
direct: Provided, however, That the serial number of the c ertificate issued by the Board shall be included
in the design of the seal.
Penal Provisions
Acts punishable by imprisonment of not less than six (6) months, nor more than five (5) years, or a fine
not less than two thousand pesos (P2,000.00) nor more than five t housand pesos (P5,000.00) or both, in
the discretion of the Court:
1. Engaging in the practice of environmental planning in the Philippines without having been
registered or without having conformed to the provisions of this Decree;
2. Presenting or attempting to use as his own the certificat e of registration of a registered

environmental planner;
3. Giving any false or forged evidence of any kind to the Board, or impersonating any registered
environmental planner;
4. Attempting to use a revoked or suspended certificate of registration;
5. Using in connection with his name or otherwise assuming, using or advertising any title or
description tending to c onvey the impression that he is an environment al planner without holding
a valid certificate of registration; or.
6. Violating any of the provisions of this Decree.

CODE OF ETHICS FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNERS IN THE
PHILIPPINES
Board of Environmental Planning, Resolution No. 01 Series of 1997
Pursuant to its powers and functions under Section 8(e) and (1), Article of P.D. 1308,
otherwise known as the “Law Regulating the Environmental Planning P rofession in the Philippines", the
Board adopts and promulgates the “Code of Ethics for Environmental Planners in the Philippines”.
 This shall be known as the “Code of Ethics for Environmental Planners in the Philippines”
 A norm of ethical standards that shall govern the personal and professional conduct
of Environmental Planners in the practice of their profession.
 Liberally construed to promote public interest and provide the Environmental Planners with
respectable standards of behavior in the practice of the profession.
Decl aration of Principles

The environmental planner shall, first and foremost commit himself to the s ervice of God, country, and
mankind. His services and endeavors shall advance the art and science of environmental planning in
accordance with the constitutional mandate of protecting the right of the people to a balanced
and healthful ecology in accord with the rhythm and harmony of nature.
He shall commit himself to the highest degree of professionalism, excellence, intelligence, skill and
integrity in the practice of his profession. He shall be a professional with utmost devotion and dedication
to his career and craft.
He shall uphold and obey all relevant laws, rules and regulations and legal orders; observe and esteem
fairness, courage, honesty and sincerity; and mindful of his role in attaining ecological balance, public
order, safety and convenience at all times.
Responsibility to the Profession and to the Organization

The Environmental Planner shall contribute to the incessant development of the profession by
sharing and improving knowledge and initiating new and innovative planning concepts and techniques.
He shall devote considerable period of time, effort, talent, and resources for the advancement of the
profession.
Initiative, Discipline and Responsibility

 He shall strive to promote the healthy growth of a strong and active professional organization.
 The Environmental Planner shall strive for high standards of professional integrity, proficiency and
knowledge. He shall take upon himself to:
 Represent his professional qualifications, affiliations, and experience accurately
 Analyze ethical and moral issues in the practice of his profession systematically and
critically and give due respect to the professional rights of others.
 Pursue a program of continuing professional education.
 Exercise independent and sound professional decision or judgment.

 Demonstrate a high degree of moral and professional integrity at all times.
Responsibility to Co-Profe ssional s

 In the practice of his profession, the Environmental Planner shall develop and enhance a
healthy professional relationship with his colleagues and other professionals.
 He shall share with them the results of experience and research which could contribute to the body of
planning knowledge.
 He shall contribute time and information to the professional development of new professionals and
other colleagues, including students of the profession.
 He shall not give opinion which will tend to destroy the professional image of his colleagues except
upon lawful order from the Court or on subpoena issued by the Board.
 He shall endeavor to increase and broaden the range of opportunities for professional involvement/
competence/ development
Relationship to Client
 The Environmental Planner shall at all times endeavor to maintain a harmonious working relationship
with his client. He shall consider his client a partner in a noble undertaking, and shall, therefore,
render professional service wit h honesty, transparency and good faith.
 He shall obs erve candor and fairness in the presentation of his professional compet ence to his client.
 He shall render competent professional s ervice to his client within the context of the “scope
of practice” of his profession.
 He shall be transparent in his dealings with his client and shall avoid activities which will create a
situation/condition of “conflict of interest” between him and his client.
 He shall render professional advice to his client on environmentally c ritical or signific ant matters.
He shall caution his client on proposed projects which may cast questionable or controversial issues
that threaten the peace and tranquility of the community.
 He shall exercise umost confidentiality of information and related documents obtained in the course of
his professional service to his client. Such information and doc uments may be made available upon
written consent of the client by legal means.
 He shall collect professional fees commensurate with the services rendered. The professional fees to
be collected shall be within the limits of the “schedule of professional fees” adopted by the P hilippine
Institute of Environment al Planners.
 He shall seek the settlement of any dispute with his client as the need arises, through voluntary
arbitration, and shall exhaust all possible means for settlement through an arbitration committee
created for the purpose.
Responsibility to the Public and to the Country

 The primary obligation of the Environmental Planner is to serve the country and in so doing safeguard
public interest.
 He shall have special concern for long-range consequence of present actions and must therefore pay
close attention to the inter-relat edness of his decisions and opinions.

 He shall strive to provide full, clear, and accurate information on planning issues and conc erns to the
general public and government decision-makers in order t o optimize their participation in the planning
process.
 He shall strive to increase choice and opportunity for all persons, a special responsibility to plan for
the needs of the disadvantaged, disabled and recognizing a special res ponsibility to plan for
the needs of the disadvantaged, disabled and underprivileged groups or persons.
 He shall diligently prot ect the natural environment, opt for excellence of environment design and
endeavor to conserve and sustain the unique physical heritage of the environment.
 He shall devote adequat e attention to the physical, economic and social problems and needs of the
people, as well as identification of positive cultural and social values and historical assets to
be preserved.
 He shall provide flexibility and choice in planning without sacrificing the integrity of the master plan to
give priority to proposals and projects which would contribute to the alleviation of poverty and
inequity, thus, promoting community and national stability and unity.
 He shall strive for a balanced urban and count ryside development in support of the efforts for our
comprehensive and sustainable economic recovery and growth.
Penal Provisions
 Violation of any of the provisions in this Code shall constitute unethical and
unprofessional conduct and, therefore, shall be a sufficient cause for the revocation of the Certificate
of Registration of a Registered E nvironment al Planner or the suspension from the practice of his
profession in accordance with S ections 17 and22, Article III of P.D. No. 1308 and Sections, 26 and
27, Rule V II, the “Rules and Regulations Governing the Examination, Registration, Licensure and
the Practice of Environmental Planning“.
Effectivity
 This Code shall take effect fifteen (15) days from its publication in the Official Gazette
or newspaper of general circulation, whichever is earlier. Done in the City of Manila on 28th day of
May, 1997.
PLANNING ORGANIZATIONS
Regional Planning Urban Planning
NEDA – National Economic Development HUDCC – Housing and Urban Development

Authority Coordinating Council
NLUC – National Land Use Committee HLURB – Housing & Land Use Regulatory
RDC – Regional Development Council Board
PDC – Provincial Development Council RLUC – Regional Land Use Committee
PLUC – Provincial Land Use Committee M/CDC – Municipal/City Development Council
Sanggunian Panlalawigan BDC – Barangay Development Council
Sanggunian Panglunsod/ Bayan
Barangay Council

 National Economic Development Authority (NEDA)
- the count ry’s independent economic development and pla nning agency mandat ed by the P hilippine
Constitution. It is headed by the President as chairman of the NE DA board, with the Secretary of Socio -
Economic Planning, concurrently NE DA Director -General, as vice-chairman. Several Cabinet members,
the Central Bank Governor, ARMM and ULAP are likewise members of the NE DA Board.
NEDA BOARD
The powers and functions of the NE DA reside in the NE DA Board. It is the country's premier social and
economic development planning and policy coordinating body.
The Board is composed of the President as chairman, the Secretary of Socio-Economic Planning and
NEDA Director-General as vice-c hairman, and the following as members: the Executive Secretary and
the Secretaries of Finance, Trade and Industry, Agriculture, Environment and Natural Resources, Public
Works and Highways, Budget and Management, Labor and Employment, and Interior and Local
Government.
Pursuant to Sec. 4 of E O 230, empowering the P resident to modify the membership of the Board
whenever deemed necessary, the following members have been added:
The Secretaries of Health, Foreign A ffairs, and A grarian Reform (per Memorandum Order No. 164, dated
21 March 1988); the Secretary of Scienc e and Technology (per Memorandum Order No. 235, dated 19
May 1989); and the Secret ary of Transportation and Communications (per Memorandum Order No. 321,
dated 26 September 1990). In addition, the S ecretary of Energy (per R.A. No. 7638, approved Dec. 9,
1992) and the Deputy Governor of the Bangko Sentral ng Pilipinas (per S ection 124 of R.A. No. 7653,
approved June 14, 1993) have been added as members of the NEDA Board.
Assisting the NEDA Board in the performance of its functions are seven cabinet -level interagency
committees. These are as follows:
1. Development Budget Coordination Committee (DBCC)
The DBCC is composed of the Secretary of B udget and Management, as chairman; the Director -General
of the NE DA Secretariat, as co-chairman; and the Executive Secretary, Secretary of Finance and the
Governor of the Central Bank of the Philippines, as members. The DB CC recommends to the President
the following:
- Level of annual govemment expenditures and the ceiling of government spending for economic
and social development, national defense, and government debt service;
- Proper allocation of expenditures for each development activity between current operating
expenditures and capital outlays; and;
- Amount set to be allocat ed for capit al outlays brok en down into the various capital or
infrastructure projects.
2. Infrastructure Committee (InfraCom)
The InfraCom is composed of the Director-General of the NE DA Secretariat, as chairman; Secretary of

Public Works and Highways, as cochairman; and the Executive Secret ary and S ecretaries of
Trans port ation and Communications, Finance, and Budget and Management, as m embers. The InfraCom
does the following:
- Advises the President and the NEDA Board on matters concerning infrastructure development,
including highways, airports, seaports and shore prot ection; railways; power generation,
transmission and distribution; telecommunications; irrigation, flood cont rol and drainage, water

supply and sanitation; national buildings for government offices; hospitals and relat ed buildings;
state colleges and universities element ary and secondary school buildings; and other public
works;
- Coordinates the activities of agencies, including government -owned or controlled corporations
involved in infrastructure development; and
- Recommends to the President government policies, programs and projects concerning
infrastructure development consistent with national development objectives and priorities.
3. Investment Coordination Committee (ICC)
The ICC consists of the Secretary of Finance, as chairman; the NE DA Director-General, as cochairman;
and the Executive Sec retary, the Secretaries of A griculture, Trade and Industry, Budget and Management
and t he Governor of t he Central B ank of t he P hilippines, as members. The ICC has the following
functions:
- E valuates the fiscal, monetary and balance of payments implications of major national projects,
and recommends to the President the timetable of their implementation on a regular basis;
- Advises the President on matters related to the domestic and foreign borrowings program; and
- Submits a status of the fiscal, monetary and balance of payments implications of major national
projects.
4. Social Development Committee (SDC)
The Committee is composed of the Secret ary of Labor and Employment, as chairman; the Director-
General of the NEDA Secretariat as co-chairman; and the Executive Secret ary, and the Secreta ries of
Education, Culture and Sports, Health, Int erior and Local Government, Agrarian Reform, Agriculture,
Social Welfare and Development, and Budget and Management, as members. The S DC performs the
following functions:
- Advises the President and the NEDA Board on matters concerning social development, including
education, manpower, health and nutrition, population and family planning, housing, human
settlements, and the delivery of other social servic es.
- Coordinates the activities of government agencies c oncerned wit h social development; and
- Recommends appropriate policies, programs and projects consistent with the national
development objectives.
5. Committee on Tariff and Related Matters (CTRM)
The CTRM is composed of the Sec retary of Trade and Industry, as chairman, with the Director-General of
the NEDA, as co-chairman. Its members are the Executive Secretary, the Secretaries of Foreign Affairs,
Agriculture, Transportation and Communications, Environment and Natural Resources, Budget and
Management, and Finance, the Governor of the Central Bank, and the Chairman of the Tariff
Commission. The CTRM does the following:
- Advises the President and the NEDA Board on Tariff and related matters and on the effects on
the country of various international developm ents;
- Coordinates agency positions and recommends national positions for international economic
negotiations; and
- Recommends to the President a continuous rationalization program for the country 's tariff
structure.
6. Regional Development Committee (RDCom )

The RDCom was creat ed by virtue of EO 257 issued on 15 Dec ember 2003. It is composed of the NEDA
Director-General , as Chair. Its member are the Secret aries of the Deparment of B udget and
Management and of t he int erior and Local Government, RDC Chair or Co-chair each c oming from Luzon,
Visayas, and Mindanao and four (4) regional development expert from the privat e sector and academe.
The RDCom performs the following functions:
- Formulates and monitors the implementation of policies that reduce regional gr owth dis parities,
and promote rational allocation of resources among regions;
- Serve as clearing house for key regional development policy/programs proposals which impact
on two or more regions;
- Formulates and monitor implement ation of the framework for regional development of the
Medium Term Philippine Development Plan;
- Directs the formulaton and review guidelines for the regional allocation of agency budgetary
resources;
- Periodically reviews the viability of the regional configuration of the country and recommend to
the President the redelineation of regions, as may be necessary; and
- Periodically reviews the composition, structure and operating mechanism of the Regional
Development Councils and recommend to the President changes as may be necessary.
7.  National Land Use Committee (NLUC)
The NLUC was created by virtue of Executive Order Nos. 770 and 770-A on 01 Dec ember 2008 and 30
September 2009, respectively .
Composed of NE DA (Chair), DE NR, DA, DA R, DTI, DPWH, DOTC, DOT, DILG, DOJ, DOS T, DOE,
HUDCC/ HLURB, NCIP, LPP, LCP, LMP and two privat e sector representatives, the Committee is primary
tasked to:
- Advise the President on matters concerning land use and physical planning;
- Formulate a national physical framework plan and ot her inter -sectoral policies and programs that
guide the rational utilization and management of the country's land and other physical res ources,
and the preparation of sub-national physical framework plans;
- Promote the integration of land use and physical planning policies, plans and program s, including
disaster risk management , into national socio-economic plans and programs;
- Decide and resolve land use policy conflicts among agencies of the national government;
- Establish and maintain, in conjunction with various appropriat e government agencies, a database
system which would identify and classify the present and possible uses of specific land areas,
public and privat e, comprising the total land resource of the nation; and
- Provide policy directions to the Regional Land Use Committee in the pe rformance of their
physical planning functions.
NEDA BOARD EX ECUTIV E COMMITTEE
Created under Memorandum Order No. 222 (dat ed 26 July, 1994, the NEDA B oard Executive Committee
resolves policy issues without the necessity of convening the entire NE DA Board. It facilitates the
decision-making process at the NE DA Board to ensure that projects or issues requiring NE DA Board
discussion and decision are immediately acted upon.
The NEDA Board Ex Com is composed of the Executive S ecretaryas Chairman; the Secretary o f Socio-
Economic Planning and NEDA Director-General as Co-Chairman; Chairpersons of the Development
Budget Coordination Committee, Investment Coordination Committee, Committee on Tariff and Related
Matters, Social Development Committee; CoChairperson of the Infrastructure Committee; and the
Governor of the Bangko Sentral ng Pilipinas.

NEDA SECRETARIAT
The NEDA Secretariat serves as the research and t echnical support arm of the NEDA Board. It also
provides technical staff support and assistance, including th e conduct of studies and formulation of policy
measures and other recommendations on the various aspects of development planning and policy
formulation, and coordination, evaluation and monitoring of plan implementation.
The Secretariat is headed by a Director-General who carries the rank and title of Secret ary of Socio-
Economic Planning and Development and who exercises general supervision and control over the
technical and administrative personnel of the Secretariat.
The NE DA Director-General is assisted by three deputy directors-general, each of whom is responsible,

respectively, for the three major offices of NE DA, the National Development Office (NDO), the Regional
Development Office (RDO) and Central Support Office (CSO).
Assisting the deputy directors-general in their task of coordinating and supervising their respective Offices
are three assistant directors-general.
Each of the Central Office Staffs is headed by a staff director, assisted by an assistant director, while
each Regional Office is headed by a regional director, assisted by an assistant regional director.
The three major Offices comprising the NE DA Secretariat, and the bureau-level Staffs under eac h are as
follows:
National Developm ent Office (NDO):
The NDO provides technical staff support to the NEDA Board in coordinating the formulation of national
and sectoral policies, plans and programs. It also monitors macroeconomic and sectoral performance,
prepares the nec essary economic reports, and conducts economic and development studies on
macrolevel plans and policies.
1.1 National Planning and Policy Staff (NPPS )
- Provides technical staff support in coordinating the formulation of national development plans and
policies;
- E valuates and conducts studies on macrolevel plans and policies;
- Develops and applies macroeconomic models and other statistical tools for planning, forecasting
and policy analysis; and
- Monitors mac roeconomic performance and prepares economic reports.
1.2 Agricul ture Staff (AS)
- Provides technical staff support in coordinating the formulation of national plans and policies for
the agricultures, natural resources and agrarian reform sectors;
- E valuates and conducts studies on policies in the said sectors;
- Provides technical staff support in the evaluation and review of proposed pro grams and projects
in the said sectors;
- Provides technical assistance in program and project identification, development and evaluation;
and
- Monitors sectoral performance.
1.3 Trade, Industry and Utilities Staff (TIUS)

- Provides technical staff support in coordinating the formulation of national plans and policies for
the trade, industry and tourism sectors;
- E valuates and conducts studies on trade and industrial policies, including those involving the
regulation and pricing of public utilities;
- Provides technical staff support in the evaluation of proposed industrial projects involving
significant government exposure;
- Assists in coordinating the formulation of national approaches to international relations and
cooperation in trade and other economic matters;
- Assists in the review and evaluation of the various investment priorities, plans and applicable
investment incentives; and
1.4 Infra structure Staff (IS)
- Provides technical staff support in coordinating the formulation of p hysical plans for the
transportation, communications, water, power and energy, and social infrastructure sectors;
- E valuates and conducts studies on policies in the said sectors;
- Provides technical staff support in the evaluation and review of proposed programs and projects
and
1.5 Social Development Staff (SDS)
- Provides technical staff support in coordinating t he formulation of national policies and plans in
education and manpower development, health and nutrition, family planning, housing, social
services, and community organization;
- E valuates and conducts studies on policies covering the said sectors;
- Provides technical staff support in the evaluation and review of proposed programs and projects
and
1.6 Public Investment Staff (PIS)
- Provides technical staff support in t he coordination and review of the flow of official development
assistance to the country to ensure consistency with national development priorities;
- Provides technical staff support in the review of proposed programs and projects on a global
basis;
- Provides technical staff support in the preparation of a rolling medium -term public investment
program, where the sources and uses of funds for priority programs and projects are indicated;
- Develops and recommends the criteria and system for evaluating projects; and
- Monitors the status of proposed and pipeline projects for possible funding assistance by foreign
donor institutions.
2. Regional Development Office (RDO)
The RDO provides technical staff support as may be required by the implementing agencies in the
regions. It also monitors regional and interregional development policies; plans and programs ; prepares
integrated reports on regional planning; and conducts studies on regional development polici es.
2.1 Regional Development Coordination Staff (RDCS)

- Provides technical staff support in coordinating t he formulation of interregional development
policies, plans and programs;
- Serves as a link between the Regional Development Councils and the national a gencies of
government involved in regional planning and program implement ation;
- Monitors and evaluates the formulation of regional policies, plans and programs by the Regional
Development Councils and other agencies of government;
- Prepares integrated reports on regional development;
- Coordinates with the Regional Development Councils in the preparation of physical and land use
plans; and
- Conducts studies on regional development policies.
2.2 Project Monitoring Staff (PMS)
- Monitors the progress of implementation of approved development programs, based on reports

from the central offices of line agencies and the NEDA regional offices;
- Identifies bottlenecks and proposes solutions to problems of implementation;
- Prepares integrated reports on the status of appro ved development projects;
- Monitors the implementation of ongoing projects, including the utilization of foreign exchange
proceeds by these projects;
- Provides technical assistance to the NE DA regional offices in project monitoring and assessment;
and
- Conducts post project evaluation and impact analyses.
2.3 Regional Office s (NROs)
- Serves as the technical staff of the Regional Development Council (RDC) in the region;
- Provides staff assistance to the RDC in the coordination of plan formulation and implementati on
at the regional level;
- Provides staff assistance to implementing agencies in the region in identifying and developing
programs and projects;
- E valuates and reviews proposed regional programs and projects for consideration by the RDC;
- Monitors and assesses project implementation in the region; and
- Coordinates with regional offices of other departments and agencies and with the local
government units in the region in the performance of their assigned tasks.
3. Central Support Office(CSO)
The CSO provides the NE DA Secret ariat technical assistance and support services in t he areas of
development administration, int ernal management improvement, legal services, development information,
and administrative services.
3.1 Management Staff (MS)
- Conducts studies, formulat es recommendations and provides technical assistance on

development administration matters;
- Develops guidelines and provides technical assistance in the preparation, monitoring and
assessment of the development administration framework of the national development plan,
including the monitoring of administrative reforms and developments in the public sector;
- Serves as internal management improvement unit, conducts studies, formulat es
recommendations and provides technical assistance on organization and m anagement matters;
and
- Develops and maintains an internal control system within the NE DA Secretariat and monitors and
evaluates on a continuing basis the implementation of int ernal control policies and meas ures.

3.2 Legal Staff (LS)
- Provides legal advice and assistance in t he formulation and implementation of development

policies, plans and programs;
- Provides legal service on operational matters;
- Conducts legal research and specialized studies; and
- Maintains a data base on and monitors laws, administrative issuances, court decisions, and other
legal issuanc es relative to economic and social development.
Other related functions:
 Secretariat to Philippine Center for Economic Development (PCE D) meetings.

 Secretariat to the NEDA Board meetings.
 Housing and Land Use Regulatory Board (HLURB) Ex-Officio Commissioner.
 National Housing Authority (NHA ) Board member.
3.3 Admini strative Staff (AdS )
- Develops, implements and updates on a continuing basis a comprehensive and integrated human
resources development program for the NEDA Secretariat personnel;
- Provides services related to personnel transactions and benefits, and discipline, health and safety
services;
- Provides financial and accounting services;and
- Provides security services and general support services in the a reas of records and
communications; procurement and property, supply equipment maintenance, utilization and
disposal; transport; general utility and housekeeping; and building and office facilities
maintenance.
3.4 Information Technology Coordination Staff (ITCS)
- Conducts and coordinates the studies, formulates rec ommendations and provides technical staff
support and assistance on information technology (IT);
- Develops and coordinates the implementation and maintenance of IT-related information systems
in support of NE DA's development planning, policy formulation and other functions and
operations;
- Coordinates the formulation and implementation of a continuing NE DA IT development activities
of NE DA offices and staffs, including its regional offices;
- Establishes and maintains a viable information network with other government agencies and
instrumentalities for more effective development planning and decision making.
3.5 Development Information Staff (DIS)
- Develops and maintains public information programs to meet the requirements of t he NE DA and
the public;
- Prepares press releases and articles for public dissemination and coordinates press briefings and
interviews;
- Undertak es the preparation and dissemination of NE DA publications and other information
materials and provides editorial and other information -related services to the NEDA Secretariat;
and
- Maintains the NE DA Secretariat library and undert akes the ac quisition, cataloguing, maintenance
and safekeeping of library materials, and provides circulation, reference and interlibrary

OTHER OFFICES
Two Sec retariat units have been created within NE DA to provide tec hnical assistance and secretariat
services to the Legislative-Executive Development Advisory Council (LEDA C) and the Special Committee
on Scholarship (SAS). A unit, the Legislative Liaison Office (LLO), has also been instituted to administer
the NEDA Legislative Liaison System (LLS ). These units have the following functions:
1.The Legislative-Executive Development Advi sory Council (LEDAC) Secretariat.
The LE DAC Secretariat provides technical assistance, administrative support and secretariat services to
the Council. The LE DAC Secretariat has the following functions:
- Provides technical and administrative support to the Council and its sub-committees, if any;
- Determines and prepares the agenda for and the minutes of the Council meetings;
- Serves as venue for the initial processing/discussion of issues prior to deliberation by the Council;
- Receives and prepares communications pertinent to the work of the Council;
- Manages and maint ains the official recordsof the Council;
- Prepares the annual budget of the Council;
- Prepares reports as required by the Council; and
- Performs other duties as maybe assigned by the Council.
2.The Legislative Liaison Office (LLO)
The LLO provides assistance in the administration of the NE DA Legislative Liaison System (LLS). The
LLO has the following functions:
- Establishes the nec essary linkage of the NEDA with bot h Houses of Congress and the
Presidential Legislative Liaison Office (PLLO);
- Provides technical support to Congressional Committees principally involved with NE DA's major
areas of conc ern; and
- Keeps track of economic bills and other proposed legislative measures pertinent to NE DA and its
areas of conc ern and promotes passage of legislation high in NE DA's agenda.
ATTACHED AGENCI ES
Six government agencies are attached to the NEDA for purposes of administrative supervision. These are
the:
- Tariff Commission (TC);

- Philippine National Volunteer Service Coordinating Agency (PNVSCA);
- National Statistical Coordination Board (NS CB);
- National Statistics Office (NS O); and
- Statistical Research and Training Center (SRTC).
Moreover, the,Philippine Institute for Development Studies (P IDS) is attached t o the NE DA for policy and
program coordination or integration.
 REGIONAL DEVELOPMENT COUNCIL (RDC)

The Regional Development Council (RDC) is the highest policy -making body in the region and serves as
the counterpart of the NE DA Board at the subnational level.

The RDC is the primary institution that coordinat es and sets the direction of all economic and social
development efforts in the region. It also serves as a forum where local efforts can be related and
integrated with national development activities.
The RDC was created in answer to the need for a single regional planning body whose main concern is
the overall socio-economic development of the region.
Regional development planning is necessary to address the uneven economic and social development in
the country. This stems from the recognition that the economic and social gains achieved so far have
been unevenly distribut ed such that much of the progress has been concentrated in a few regions.
The RDC was established by virtue of Letter of Implement ation No. 22 issued on 31 December 1972
pursuant to the implementation of the Int egrated Reorganization Plan of 1972. Its present c onstitutional
foundation rests on Article X, Section 14 of the 1987 Philippine Constitution, which states that:
“The President shall provide for regional development councils, or other similar bodies composed of local
government officials, regional heads of departments and other offices, and representatives from non -
government organizations within the region for purposes of administrative decent ralization to strengthen
the autonomy of units therein and to accelerate the economic and social development of the units in the
region.”
To carry out this provision, P resident Corazon C. Aquino issued Executive Order 308 on 05 November
1987, which reorganized t he RDC. Subs equent amendments include EOs 318 (s.1988), 347 and 366 (s.
1989), 455 (s.1991) and 505 (s. 1992). On 12 April 1996, the foregoing EOs were repealed with the
issuance of EO 325 signed by President Fidel V. Ramos. This latest issuance further strengthened the
RDCs to mak e it more responsive t o new developments in socio -political fields and to ensure sustainable
and broad-based development process.
The RDC is established in each of the administrative regions of the country except for the following
special regions: (a) Cordillera Administrative Region; (b) Autonomous Region of Muslim Mindanao; and
(c) National Capital Region.
EO 220, series of 1997, created the Cordillera Executive B oard for the Cordillera Administrative Region.
In the Aut onomous Region of Muslim Min danao, RA 6734 established the Regional Planning and
Development Board. In the National Capital Region, the Met ropolitan Manila Development Authority was
created under RA 7924.
The organized RDC is composed of three major sectors namely: the LGUs, governm ent agencies and the
private sector. The three sectors are in turn, composed of the following:
- The LGUs: all provincial governors; all city mayors; mayors of municipalities designated as
provincial capitals; presidents of the provincial leagues of mayors of the region; and mayor of the
municipality designated as the regional center.
- The Government Agencies: regional directors of agencies represented in the NE DA Board
(NE DA, DAR, DA, DBM, DE NR, DOF, DFA, DOH, DILG, DOLE, DPWH, DOS T, DTI, DOTC), and
regional directors of DepE d, DSWD and DOT.
- The Private Sector: Repres entatives of the privat e sector and NGOs based in the region who
shall comprise one fourth (1/4) of the membership of the fully constituted Council. There shall be
at least one private sector representative from the labor sector as prescribed under EO No. 384.
The RDC may designate s pecial non-voting members of the Council subject to the c oncurrence of the
majority of its regular members

The officers of the RDC include the Chair, the Co-Chair, the Vice-Chair and the Secretary. The Chair and
the Co-Chair jointly head the Council. The NEDA Regional Director serves as the ex-officio Vice-Chair of
the RDC, while the NEDA Assistant Regional Director acts as the ex -officio Secret ary of the Council.
The P resident shall select and appoint t he RDC Chair and Co-Chair from at least two local chief
executives who are ex-officio members and two private sector representatives nominated by the council.
If t he Chairman is from the government sector, the Co-Chairman shall be selected from t he private sector
and vice-versa.
The terms of office of the Chair, Co-Chair and privat e sector representatives coincide with the regular
term of local elective officials which is a fixed period of three years. This prescribed term of office is
without prejudice to reappointment.
A “private sector representative” refers to a person who represents the non-government sector. He/she
may be an active member of the following private sector organizations:
a) non-government organizations (NGOs);

b) business groups;
c) professional organizations and civic groups
NEDA Board Res olution No. 17 (s. 1996), says that any Filipino citizen wit h a proven track record in
socioeconomic development in the region and who is willing and able to participate i n all RDC activities
shall also be considered a represent ative of the private sector; in which case t his individual should be
formally nominated by a qualified private sector organization (PSO) duly accredited by the RDC.
A nominee however must not hold any government position, whether appointive or elective, and must not
receive any remuneration from the government while serving as privat e sector representative to the RDC.
A qualified PS O must be duly recognized by the Securities and Exchange Commission (S E C) or any
government agency that registers organizations and associations for the purpose of bestowing legal
personality.
In addition, the PSO must have conducted socioeconomic development activities for at least three years
in the region and the scope of their activities must be at least provincewide or citywide.
Foreign organizations, its branches and affiliates, cannot participate in the selection of PSRs.
Organizations having government officials as ex-officio members or which is operating projects from the
funds of the government are also disqualified.
QUALIFICA TIONS OF PS R NOMINEES:
- Must be Filipino citizens of legal age, not otherwise disqualified by law, with proven track record
in socio-economic development in t he region, and must be willing and able to participate in all
RDC activities.
- A nominee must not hold any government position, whether appointive or elective, and must not
receive any remuneration from the government while serving as private sector represent ative to
the RDC.
- The nominee must have been formally nominated by a qualified private sector organization duly
accredited by the RDC.
The PSRs are selected through the following process:
- The RDC Secretariat shall first prepare the list of accredited PSOs in the region and determine
the sectoral and geographic coverage of the said organizations. The RDC ex-officio members

shall determine the sectoral and geographical allocation of the one-fourth membership of the
private sector in the RDC.
- The qualified PSOs shall then submit their PSR nominees and list of official voters. Only two
nominees, one sectoral and the other for geographic represent ation, shall be accepted per PSO.
The selection of PSRs shall be done by secret balloting after the list of official nominees has
been presented to the official voters representing the qualified PSOs.
- The RDC Secretariat shall tally the vot es and proclaim the successful nominees.
All confirmed PS Rs shall serve for a period of three years, without prejudic e to reappointment through the
same process of nomination and confirmation mentioned above. The t erm of the RDC Chair/ Co-Chair
who comes from the private sector is co-terminus with his term as PSR.
 Housing and Land Use Regulatory Board (HLURB)

– the planning, regulatory and quasi -judicial instrumentality of government for land use development.
HLURB has the twin roles of enhancing and reinforcing rational housing and real estate service delivery
via a triad of strategies namely; policy, planning and regulation. Such rules are enunciated and defin ed in
Presidential Decrees (PD), Letters of Instruction (LOI), Republic Acts (RA), Executive Orders (EO), Office
of the President Memorandum Circulars (OP -MC) and Batas Pambansa (BP).
On Rational Land Use

The HLURB pursues activitie s to attain rational land use as specified in a number of directives.
 Extend planning assistance to Local Government Units (LGUs) (LOI No. 729, EO No. 648);
 Review and ratify land use plans of Metro Manila cities and municipalities, provinces, highly
urbanized cities and independent component cities (EO No. 72);
 Enforce zoning regulations (EO No. 648);
 Investigat e and adjudicate complaints (EO No. 648);
 Assist local government units assume devolved functions via training and consultation;
 Coordinate land reclassification clearance system (MC No. 54);
 Update and revise rules, guidelines and standards on land use (E O No. 648); and
 Update and revise National Urban Development and Housing Framework (RA No. 7279).
On Real Estate and Housing Regulations

The HLURB functions relative to Real Estate and Housing Regulations are specified in various
directives:
 Enforce laws, rules, standards and guidelines through:

 Approval of condominium plans (P D No. 957);
 Subdivision Plans: HLURB's foremost function is to prot ect buyers of housing units and
home lots, and condominium units against unscrupulous practices in the industry; and
 Issuance of License to Sell (PD No. 957).
 Assist LGUs perform the devolved function of processing and approving the subdivision plans via
training and consultation (EO No. 71)
 Issue sales and mortgage clearances for the prot ection of rights of tenants in the urban
and land reform zones and areas for priority development (P D No. 1517)
 Update and revise rules guidelines and standards on housing and real estate for:
o Residential subdivisions and condominiums (P D No. 957)
o Economic and socialized housing projects (BP Blg. 220)
 Approve expansion of a condominium corporation or int egration of a condominium project with
another project upon the affirmative vote of a simple majority of registered owners (RA No. 7899)
 Assurance of completion of projects (PD No. 957)
 Investigation and adjudication of complaints (PD No. 957)

 Assurance of compliance to balanc ed housing development requirement (Sec 18, R.A.
7279)
 Balanced housing development (RA No. 7279)
 Other types of subdivision and condominium projects (EO No. 648 and related laws)
 Operate as the lead agency for the HUDCC for t he Socialized Housing One -stop P rocessing
Cent ers (S HOPCs ) and issuance of permits, clearances, certificat ions and licenses for the
implementation of socialized housing projects (EO No. 184)
 Approve any amendment to or revocation of the enabling or master deed of a condominium
project already decided upon by a simple majority of all registered owners (RA No. 7899)
 Approve expansion of a condominium corporation or int egration of a condominium project with
another project upon the affirmative vote of a simple majority of registered owners (RA No. 7899)
Quasi Judicial Functions

Quasi-Judicial Functions – HLURB has designat ed Housing and Land Use A rbiters (HLAs) at the Central
Office, in each of the Regional Field Offices and for s pecial assignments, hear and decide on complaints
against violation of pertinent legislation's and HLURB rules and regulations. The HLURB Rules of
Procedures for adjudication of cases provides for just speedy and inexpensive proceedings, amicable
settlements, summary resolution and other legal tools.
The aggrieved party in a resolved case may file a petition for review or appeal the decisi on of the HLA to
the Board of Commissioners. The decision of t he Board is appealable to the Office of the President which
decisions shall be final subject only to review by the Supreme Court.
HOA Functions of HLURB

In January 2000, Republic Act No. 8763 trans ferred t o this Board the functions of t he Home Guaranty
Corporation with respect to Homeowners Associations.
Devolved Functions
Pursuant to the prescription of RA No. 7160 (loc al Government Code of 1991) and as det ailed under EO
No. 71 and EO No. 72, certain HLURB functions were devolved to the LGU's:
 The S angguniang B ayan or Sanguniang Panglungsod shall, subject to national law, process and
approve subdivision plans for residential, commercial, industrial or ot her development purpose.
 The Sangguniang Panlalawigan shall review and approve t he comprehensive land use plans of
component cities and municipalities.
 Cities and municipalities wit h CLUPs reviewed and approved in accordance wit h EO 72 shall
issue locational clearance to locally significant projec ts.
Key Officials:
CHA IRMAN - HON. JEJOMAR C. BINAY
Vice President of the Philippines and
Chairman, Housing and Urban Development Coordinating Council
15th Floor Banco De Oro Bldg., Paseo de Roxas, Makati City
BOARD OF C OMMISSIONERS
The Board of Commissioners whic h sets and promulgates HLURB policies and steers its operation, is a
nine-man crew with t he Chairman, HUDCC at the helm, as ex -officio Chairman. Its members are four full-
time Commissioners appointed by t he P resident with one designated as the Chief Exec utive Offic er, and
four ex-officio Commissioners, namely the Undersecretaries of the Department of Justice, Interior and
Local Governments and Public Works and Highways and the Deputy Director -General of the National
Economic and Development Authority.

It serves as a collegium in the resolution of cas es which are appeals from the decision of the HLURB
arbiters, regional officers, local zoning administrators and loc al boards of appeal.
Each full time commissioner supervis es a functional area at the central office and t wo to five regional field
offices.
Local Development Councils (RA 7160, Title Six )

Each local government unit shall have a c omprehensive multisectoral development plan to be initiated by
its development council and approved by its sanggunian. For this purpose, the development council at
the provincial city, municipal, or barangay level, shall assist the corresponding sanggunian in setting the
direction of economic and social development, and coordinating development efforts within its territ orial
jurisdiction.
Composition of Local Development Councils. - The composition of the local development council shall be
as follows:
a. The barangay development council shall be headed by the punong barangay and shall be
composed of the following members:
1. Members of the sangguniang barangay;
2. Representatives of non-governmental organizations operating in the barangay, who
shall constitute not less than one fourth (1/4) of the members of the fully organized
council;
3. A representative of the congressman.
b. The city or municipal development council shall be headed by the may or and shall be composed
of the following members:
4. All punong barangays in the city or municipality;
1. The c hairman of the committee on appropriations of the sangguniang panlungs od or
sangguniang bayan concerned;
2. The congressman or his represent ative; and
3. Representatives of nongovernmental organizations operating in the city or
municipality, as the case may be, who shall constitute not less than one-fourth (1/4)
of the members of the fully organized council.
c. The provincial development council shall be headed by the governor and shall be composed of
the following members:
1. All mayors of component cities and municipalities;
2. The chairman of the committee on appropriations of the s angguniang panlalawigan;
3. The congressman or his represent ative; and
4. Representatives of nongovernmental organizations operating in the province, who
shall constitute not less than one -fourth (1/4) of the members of the fully organized
council.
The local development councils may call upon any local official concerned or any official of national
agencies or offices in the local government unit to assist in the formulation of their respective
development plans and public investment programs.
Representation of Non-Governmental Organizations. - Within a period of sixty (60) days from the start of
organization of local development councils, the nongovernmental organiz ations shall c hoose from among
themselves their representatives to said councils. The local sanggunian concerned shall accredit
nongovernmental organizations subject to such criteria as may be provided by law.
Functions of Local Development Councils
The provincial, city, and municipal development councils shall exercise the following functions:

 Formulate long-t erm, medium-t erm, and annual socioeconomic development plans and policies;
 Formulate the medium -term and annual public investment programs;
 Appraise and prioritize socioeconomic development programs and projects;
 Formulate local investment incentives to promote the inflow and direction of private investment
capital;
 Coordinate, monitor, and evaluate the implementation of development programs and projects;
and
 Perform such ot her functions as may be provided by law or compet ent authority.
The barangay development council shall exercise the following functions:
 Mobilize people's participation in local development efforts;

 Prepare barangay development plans based on local requirements;
 Monitor and evaluat e the implementation of national or local programs and projects; and
 Perform such ot her functions as may be provided by law or compet ent authority.
Meetings and Quorum. - The local development council shall meet at least once every six (6) months or
as often as may be necessary.
Executive Committee. - (a) Each loc al development council shall create an exec utive c ommittee to
represent it and act in its behalf when it is not in session. The composition of the executive committee
shall be as follows:
(1) The executive committee of the provincial development council shall be composed of the governor as
chairman, the representative of component city and municipal mayors to be chosen from among
themselves, the chairman of the committee on appropriations of the sangguniang panlalawigan, the
president of the provincial league of barangays, and a representative of nongovernmental organizations
that are represented in the council, as members;
(2) The executive committee of t he city or municipal development council shall be composed of the
mayor as chairman, the chai rman of the committee on appropriations of the sangguniang panlalawigan,
the president of the city or municipal league of barangays, and a representative of nongovernmental
organizations that are represented in the council, as members; and
(3) The executi ve committee of the barangay development council shall be composed of the punong
barangay as chairman, a representative of the sangguniang barangay to be chosen from among its
members, and a representative of nongovernmental organizations that are represented in the council, as
members.
(b) The executive committee shall exercise the following powers and functions:
(1) Ensure that the decision of the council are faithfully carried out and implemented;
(2) Act on matters requiring immediate attention or action by the council;
(3) Formulate policies, plans, and programs based on the general principles laid down by the
council; and
(4) Act on other matters that may be authorized by the council.
Sectoral or Functional Committees. - The local development councils may form sectoral or functional
committees to assist them in the performance of their functions.

Secretariat. - There is hereby c onstituted for each local development c ouncil a sec retariat which shall be
responsible for providing technical support, docume ntation of proceedings, preparation of reports and
such other assistance as may be required in the discharge of its functions. The loc al development council
may avail of the services of any nongovernmental organization or educational or researc h institutio n for
this purpose.
The secret ariats of the provincial, city, and municipal development councils shall be headed by their
respective planning and development coordinators. The secretariat of the barangay development council
shall be headed by the barangay secretary who s hall be assisted by the city or municipal planning and
development coordinator concerned.
Relation of Local Development Councils to the Sanggunian and the Regional Development Council. - (a)
 The policies, programs, and projects proposed by local development councils shall be submitted
to the s anggunian concerned for appropriate action. The local development plans approved by
their respective sanggunian may be int egrated with the development plans of the next higher
level of local development council.
 The approved development plans of provinces, highly -urbanized cities, and independent
component cities shall be submitted to the regional development council, which shall be
integrated into the regional development plan for submission to t he National Economic and
Development Authority, in accordance with existing laws.
Budget Information. - The Department of B udget and Management shall furnish the various local
development councils information on financial resources and budgetary allocations applicable to their
respective jurisdictions to guide them in their planning functions.
THE P HILIPPINE PLANNING SYSTEM AND PLAN

IMPLEMENTATION
Concepts of Planning
 “Public” planning
 Planning as a “function of government” grounded on the combined weight of acceptable
technical soundness and political considerations
 Aimed at improving the overall welfare of the people
 “Making a choice” from a set of alternatives
 “Development control” over privat e property
General Definition of Planning
Allocation of land resources to obtain efficiency in the utilization of the built environm ent and to
preserve the quality of the natural environment
Process of identifying and addressing socio-economic problem s that affect society, and of providing
alternatives or options for decision makers
Legal Basis of Planning

1. Power of Eminent Domain - Government has the right to take property for public purposes;
payment of just compensation, due process of law
2. Power of Taxation - Government has the right to impose taxes

3. Police Power - Regulate activities of the private parties to protect the interest of the people –
health, safety, public welfare; Further established the principle that compensation need not be
paid for any loss of property value that zoning might impose
The Philippine Constitution
Art. 2 Sec. 5 – Promotion of the general welfare

Art. 2 Sec. 16 – Right of people to balanced and healthful ecology
Art. 2 Sec. 9 – Improved quality of life
Art. 12 Sec. 6 – Use of property bears social function
The Local Government Code
Sec. 16 – Promotion of the general welfare of the people

Sec. 106 – LGU to prepare local development plan
Sec. 17 – Devolution of the delivery of basic services and facilities
Sec. 20 – Land reclassification
Sec. 35 – LGUs linkage wit h people’s organizations and NGOs
Sec. 26 & 27 – Conduct of consultation with stakeholders
JMC No. 1, S. 2007
By NEDA – Met hodology for preparing the Provincial Development and P hysical Framework Plan
(PDPFP) and Provincial Development Investment Program (P DIP )
By DILG – Methodology for preparing the Comprehensive Land Use Plan (CLUP ),
Comprehensive Development Plan (CDP), and Local Development Investment Program (LDIP)
using the Rationalized (Local) Planning System or RPS
Geographic Boundaries of Planning
National – geographic boundaries of the entire Philippine territory
Regional – a planning area that is sub-national and supra-urban
 Super Region
 Administrative Region
 Autonomous Region (i.e., ARMM)
 Economic region (e.g., Special Economic Zone)
 Metropolitan Area (e.g., MMDA, Metro Cebu, Metro Naga)
 Natural resource-based (Bicol River Basin, Laguna Lake, Pasig River)
Local Government Unit – a planning area that is within political subdivisions of the country
 Province – geographic boundaries of a provinc e

 City/Municipality – geographic boundaries of a town or city
 Barangay – geographic boundaries of a barangay
Urban Planning
• The art and science of ordering the use of land and siting of buildings and communication
routes so as to secure maximum practicable degree of economy, convenience a nd beauty

• Aimed at creating livable communities and ultimately improving the overall welfare of the people
• In t he P hilippine context, it applies to the geographic boundaries of, or specific areas within a
town or city but an urban area is not detached from the rest of the planning areas thus, the link
between urban planning and the national mandate, super regions, and local level planning
• A key link of bringing local government to the people, wit hin the context of devolution and
decentralization
• Local planning, when enacted into legislation t rans forms to a statutory plan such as the Zoning
Ordinanc e; which is implemented by the executive branch of the town or city
Planning Processes
Figure 3. The Planning Process

CDP Process

CLUP – CDP INTERFACE
Hierarchy of Philippine Plans

Physical Socio-economic National Government Investment
Level Framework Plan Development Plan Agency (NGA) Plan Program
National National Medium-Term National Government Medium-Term

Framework for Philippine Agency Plans Philippine
Physical Planning Development Plan Investment Program
Region Super Regions
Regional Physical Regional Regional NGA Plans Regional

Framework Plan Development Plan Development
Investment Program
Provincial/City Provincial/City Provincial/City Provincial/City NGA Provincial/City

Physical Comprehensive Plans Development
Framework Plan Development Plan Investment Program
Provincial Development and Physical

Framework Plan
Municipal Comprehensive Municipal Municipal NGA Plans Local Development

Land Use Plan Comprehensive Investment Program
Development Plan

National Level Plans
• National Framework for Physical Planning (NPFP)
– A long-term (2001-2030) physical framework plan that spells out land use policy
guidelines on settlements development, production and protection land uses, and
infrastructure development;
– Anchored on the principles of sustainable development and growth with social equity
• Medium-Term Philippine Development Plan (MTPDP)
– Development blue print that is co-terminus with the 6-year term of office of the president
– Provides the overall strategy to spur economic growth and development
• Medium-Term Philippine Investment Program (MTPIP)
– Addresses the investment requirements of the MTP DP
Regional Level Plans
Super Regions - A strategy clustering regions, provinces, and cities and municipalities based on their
comparative advantages
• To stimulate economic growth
• Move the locus of development away from MetroManila to the regions
• Sharpen the country’s competitive edge vis-à-vis the rest of the Asian neighbor countries
• There were 152 infrastructure projects in t he MTPIP that should have been completed by 2010 -
mostly infrastructure building projects such as airports, seaports, roads, and bridges – to hasten
the connection of islands scattered throughout the archipelago
The Super Regions
• Nort h Luzon Agribusiness Quadrangle (NLA Q) for agribusiness development
• Luzon Urban Belt way (LUB) for globally competitive logistics and services hub
• Cent ral Philippines for tourism development
• Mindanao also for agribusiness development
• Cyber Corridor for the promotion of information and communications technology nationwide
Local Government Level Plans
1. Land Use Plan
– Cont ains the principles and policies governing the use of land
– Four broad land use policy areas
• Protection – NIPAS, Non-NIPAS, protected agricultural lands, environmentally
constrained areas
• Production – agricultural production, industrial, commercial, tourism
• Settlements – predominantly residential area (located in the urban, rural and
Indigenous Peoples areas)
• Infrastructure – transportation, social and economic infrastructure, administrative
support
2. Physical Framework Plan

– Alternative s patial strategies and preferred spatial strategy based on evaluation criteria
(e.g., hierarchy of centers, population projection, potential sources of economic growt h,
huge infrastructure projects)
3. Land Use Plan (Municipal Level)
– Detailed land use plan identifying areas for general land uses, and urban land uses such
as residential, commercial, industrial, and institutional (which are lumped as built -up
areas in the provincial and regional plans)
– Comprehensive, that is, covering the entire geographic boundaries of a municipality
4. Sectoral Development Plan
– National and Regional Levels
• Sectors according to the groupings of national and regional line agencies
– Local Level covers five sectors:
– Social Development
– Local Economic Development
– Infrastructure Development
– Environmental Management
– Institutional Development
–
5. Social Development Plan
– Addresses the provision of adequat e and timely social services to the people
– Conc erns include education, health and nutrition, social welfare, physically challenged,
socialized housing, recreation, police and fire protection
6. Local Economic Development Plan
– Answers to two questions: What are the sources of economic growt h in the planning
area? How can this economic growth be sustained?
– Looks at how government can help
– Enhance investments from bot h the public and private sectors;
– Employ the members of the labor force

– Economic sectors include primary (agriculture), secondary (industry), and t ertiary
(services) (and now the quaternary sector)
7. Infrastructure Plan
– Provision of infrastructure requirements to address social, economic, and insti tutional
concerns of various stakeholders
• Social Infrastructure – hospitals, health centers, day care cent ers, schools,
recreational facilities, home for the aged, etc.
• Economic Infra structure – irrigation facilities, warehousing facilities, etc.
• Institutional Infra structure – structures for administration and governance
• Transportation Infra structure – roads and bridges, airports, seaports, etc.
8. Environmental Management Plan

– Deals wit h specific concerns to preserve the quality of land, air and water
9. Institutional Development Plan
– Takes into consideration
• Organization and Management
• Policies
• Financial and human resource capability of the government
• Institutional linkages
LGU Authority Levers for Plan Implementation

1. Zoning
2. Taxation
3. Power of eminent domain
4. Co-management of natural resources
5. Public investment
6. Privat e investment incentives
Zoning
Zoning - the division of the city into districts or zones & prescribing regulations for the use of each district
or zone.
Basis of LGU aut hority to zone- Constitution, A rt. XII, Sec. 6 & Art. XIII, Sec.1, Local Government Code,
Sec. 20 (c) & Sec. 447, 458, 468
Powers of the Local Sanggunian regarding CLUP and Zoning (RA 7160, Sec. 447, 458, 468)
1. Generat e and maximize use of resources and revenues

2. Prescribe reasonable limits and restraints on the use of property
3. Adopt a comprehensive land use plan for the municipality
4. Reclassify land within the jurisdiction of the municipality
5. Enact integrated zoning ordinances
Technical Implications of New Zoning Under RA 7160
1. Zoning should be comprehensive in scope

2. Zoning should embrace both land and water us e
3. Zoning should cover the four policy areas of settlements, infrastructure, production and
protection areas

Framework for New Zoning
Land Use Categories/

Private Domain Public Domain Ance stral Domain
Zoning Di stricts
Protected Areas
Production Areas
Settlement Areas
Infrastructure Area s
Total Catchment Concept
Taxation
 Real Property Taxation as Land Use Regulatory Tool
 The basic real property tax as a tax on privilege to own (not use) land
 Special levies on land as revenue raising and regulatory measure
o Special Education Fund
o Idle lands tax
o Special benefit assessment
Power of Eminent Domain

The taking of privat e property for public purpose. This power of the State is limited by c onstitutional
safeguards viz:

- taking must be for public purpos e
- Traditionally confined to ac quisition of sites, rights -of-way and easements for public works
projects
- Acquisition of private land for t he benefit of the poor & the landless is now considered public
purpose (RA 7160, Sec. 19; RA 6657)
- there must be due process
- just compensation must be paid
Co-management of Territorial Domains (Sec. 3 (i), RA 7160)

Local government units shall share with the national government the responsibility in t he management
and maintenance of ecological balance within their territorial jurisdiction, s ubject to the provisions of this
Code and national policies.
 Co-management of Natural Resources (Joint Memorandum Circular (DILG -DENR) Nos. 1998-01
and 2003-01) - Mechanics and structure for co-management of forest resources
Public Investment
1. Local Development Investment Program (LDIP)
List of Programs, Projects and Activities (PPAs) that could be funded by the municipal
government and other sources of funds (national government, foreign donors, loans, etc.) for six
(6) years
2. Annual Investment Plan (A IP)
List of PPAs to be funded by the municipal government per year and the budget ary requirement
3. Executive and Legislative Agenda (E LA)
List of PPAs to be funded by the municipal government per year
Policies to be implemented by the municipal government consistent with the CDP
Private Investment Incentives

Fiscal Policies
Joint Venture Schemes
Public – Private Partnership Schemes (BO T Scheme and its variants)
A.O. 353: GUDELI NES FOR PROTECTION OF AREAS NON -NEGOTI ABLE FOR CONV ERSION
DEFINITION OF TERMS
Agricultural Land refers to lands devoted to agricultural activity and not classified as mineral, forest, residential,
commercial or industrial land.
Acquifer Recharge refer to sources of water replenishment where rainwater or seepage actually enters the
acquifers. Acquifers are sources of water from the ground.
Environmentally Critical Areas refer to areas declared by law as:

 Areas for natural parks, watershed reserves, wildlife preserves, and sanctuaries
 Areas set aside as aesthetic potential tourist spots
 Areas which constitute the habitat for any endangered species

 Areas of unique historic, archaeological, or scientific interests
 Areas which are traditionally occupied by cultural communities and tribes
 Areas with critical slopes
 Areas frequently visited by natural calamities
 Areas classified as prime agricultural lands
 Recharge areas of acquifers
 Water bodies
 Mangrove areas
 Coral reefs
 Mossy and virgin forests
 River banks
 Swamp forests and farmlands
Highly Restricted Areas Within Network of Protected Areas for Agricultural De velopment refers to the most
efficient agricultural land that can be grown to a wide range of crops with minimum to moderate level of farm
management requirement.
RATIONALIZED LOCAL PLANNING SYSTEM

Ernesto M. Serot e
Selected Features
 Faithful compliance with LGC provisions

 Limit LGU-mandated plans to the CLUP and CDP
 NGAs to dovetail their requirements with the local planning system
 Less technocratic, more participatory and consultative
Components of the Local Planning System
 Planning structure
 Planning mandat es
 Planning process
 LGU Aut hority Levers
LOCAL PLANNING STRUCTURE
Components of the Local Planning Structure

POLITICAL TE CHNICA L
► Local Sanggunian ► Local Planning and Development Office

► Local Development Council ► LGU Department Heads
► Congressman’s ► Local Special Bodies
Representative ► LDC Sectoral/Functional Committees
► Civil Society Organizations ► NGA Office Chiefs in the locality
► Privat e Sector Representatives
Structure of Loc al Development Council (LDC)

SUGGESTED SECTORAL COMMITTEE COMPOSITION
Sectoral Committee Core Technical Expanded Technical Full-Blown Sectoral
Working Group Working Group Committee
(Must be there) (Nice to have around) (The more the merrier)
1. SOCIAL MPDO Staff Police Chief Sports Organizations

DEVELOPME NT SWDO Fire Marshall Labor Groups
MHO Local Civil Registrar Religious Leaders
POSO Population Officer Senior Citizens
LDC Rep (brgy)LDC PCUP Media Reps
Rep (CS O) Nutrition Officer YMCA/YWCA
District Supervisor Housing Board Rep Inner Wheel Club
PTA Federation NSO School Principals
Sanggunian Rep Manager GSIS/SSS Charitable Organizations
2. ECONOMIC Chambers of Commerce

DEVELOPME NT PESOAgriculturist & Industry
Lions Club
Tourism Officer DTI Representative
Jaycees
Coop Devt Officer Trade Unions
Rotary Club
MPDO StaffLDC Rep Bank Managers
Academe
(brgy) Market Vendors
Other int erested groups
LDC Rep (CSO) Sidewalk Vendors
and individuals
Sanggunian Rep Cooperatives
Trans port Orgs
3. PHYSICAL/ Municipal Engineer Electric Coop Rep Other int erested groups
LAND USE Zoning Officer Water District Rep and individuals
DEVELOPME NT MPDO Staff Real Estate Developers Academe
LDC Rep (brgy) Professional
LDC Rep (CSO) organizations
Sanggunian Rep Telecommunications
Municipal Archit ect companies
4.ENVIRONME NTAL MPDO Staff Sanitary Inspector Environmental

MANAGEMENT Sanggunian Rep Academe Advocat es
LDC Rep (brgy) CENRO PENRO Other int erested groups
LDC Rep (CSO) FARMC Reps and individuals
General Services Head BFAR Rep
LG-E NRO Heads of private
hospitals
5. INS TITUTIONAL MPDO Staff HRDO Religious groups

DEVELOPME NT LDC Rep (brgy) Treas urer Good Governance
LDC Rep (CSO) Budget Officer advocates
LGOO Assessor Other int erested groups
Local Administrator Academe and individuals
Sanggunian Rep
CORE TE CHNICAL WORK ING GROUP – composed of Local Government officials and functionaries
whos e tasks and responsibilities address the concerns of the particular sector directly or indirectly.
“NICE TO HAVE AROUND” – other LGU officials, national government agencies operating in the locality,
and important non-government organizations with functions and advocacies touching on the
concerns of the particular sector. When added to the core TWG the resulting body becomes the
Expanded TWG.

“THE MORE THE ME RRIER” – other groups and individuals, mainly from non-government sectors, who
have a stake in local development in whatever capacity, enrich and enliven the full -blown
committee’s deliberations with their varied views, agendas, and advocacies.
PLANNING MA NDA TES OF LOCA L GOVE RNME NTS
Sec. 15, LGC Political and Corporate Nat ure of LGUs.
E very LGU is a body politic & corporate endowed with powers to be exercised by it in conformity
with law. As such, it shall exercise powers as a political subdivision of the National Government and as a
corporate entity representing the inhabitants of its territory.
Sec. 2 (a), LGC Declaration of Policy.
The State that the territorial & political subdivisions of the State shall enjoy genuine & meaningful
local autonomy to enable them to attain their fullest development as self-reliant communities & make
them more effective partners in the attainment of national goals.
Planning Implication for the LGU
 To manage its territory on behalf of the National State.

 To promote the general welfare of its inhabitants.
Two comprehensive plans mandated in LGC
 CLUP to manage the entire territory (Sec. 20, c)

 CDP to promote the general welfare (Sec.106)
Sec. 20(c), RA 7160
The local government units shall, in conformity with existing laws, continue to prepare their respective
comprehensive land use plans enacted through zoning ordinanc es which shall be the primary and
dominant bases for the future use of land resources: Provided, That the requirements for food production,
human settlements, and industrial expansion shall be taken into consideration in the preparation of such
plans.
Sec. 3(i), RA 7160
Local government units shall share with t he National Government the responsibility in the management
and maintenance of ecological balance within their territorial jurisdiction, subject to the provisions of thi s
Code and national policies;

THE CLUP AND THE MA NAGEMENT OF LOCAL TE RRITORIES
The 4 CLUP Policy Areas

THE COMPRE HENS IVE DEVELOPME NT PLAN
Sec. 106, RA 7160
Each local government unit shall have a comprehensive multi-sectoral development plan to be initiated by
its development council and approved by its sanggunian… the LDCs shall assist their corresponding
sanggunian in setting the direction of economic development, and coordinating development efforts within
their territorial jurisdiction.
Section 16, RA 7160
General Welfare. - E very local government unit shall exercise the powers expressly granted, those
necessarily implied t herefrom, as well as powers nec essary, appropriate, or incidental for its efficient and
effective governance, and those which are essential t o the promotion of the general welfare. Within their
respective territorial jurisdictions, local government units shall ensure and support, among other things,
the preservation and enrichment of culture, promote health and safety, enhance the right of the people to
a balanced ecology, encourage and support the development of appropriate and self-reliant scientific and
technological capabilities, improve public morals, enhance economic prosperity and social justice,
promote full employment among their residents, maintain peace and order, and preserve the c omfort and
convenience of their inhabitants.

THE DEV ELOPMENT SECTORS & S UB-S ECTORS
PLANNING PROCESS
 CLUP (General & LGC-Compliant

 Conventional Sectoral Planning
 Simplified Sectoral Planning
 Combined CLUP -CDP Process
 Simplified CLUP -CDP Process

Sectoral Development Planning Process

LGU Aut hority Levers for Plan Implement ation
 Regulation
 Taxation
 Public Investment
 Privat e Investment Incentives
 Co-management
Regulation
 Zoning
 Subdivision Regulation
 Building Regulation
 Environmental Law Enforcement
Taxation
 Basic Taxes

 Special Levies on Property
- Special Education Fund
- Idle Lands Tax
- Special Benefit Levy
Public Investment
 Local Development Investment Program

 Annual Investment Plan
Private Investment Incentive s
 Fiscal Policies
 Joint Ventures
 B-O-T Schemes
NA TIONA L-LOCAL GOVE RNMENT CO-MA NAGEME NT OF THE ENVIRONME NT AND NA TURA L
RESOURCES

Module 6. SPECIAL
PLANNING STUDIES

SHELTER
RA 7279: THE URBAN DEVELOPMENT AND HOUSING ACT OF 1992
DEFINITION OF TERMS
Affordable Cost refers to the most reasonable pric e of land and s helter bas ed on the needs and
financial capability of Program beneficiaries and appropriate financing schemes.
Areas For Priori ty Development refers to those areas declared as such under existing statutes
and pertinent executive issuances.
Blighted Lands refers to t he areas where the structures are dilapidated, obsolet e and
unsanitary, tending to depreciate the value of t he land and prevent no rmal development and use
of the area.
Consul tation refers to the constitutionally mandated process whereby the public, on their own or
through people’s organizations, is provided an opportunity to be heard and to participate in the
decision-making process on matters involving t he protection and promotion of its legitimate
collective interests, which shall include appropriate document ation and feedback mechanisms.
Idle Lands refers to non-agricultural lands in urban and urbanizable areas on which no
improvements, as herein defined, have been made by the owner, as certified by the city,
municipality or provincial assessor.
Improvements refers to all types of buildings and residential units, walls, fences, structures or
constructions of all kinds of a fix ed character or which are adhered to the soil but shall not include
trees, plants and growing fruits, and other fixtures t hat are mere superimpositions on t he land,
and the value of improvements shall not be less than 50% of the assessed value of the property.
Joint Venture refers to the commitment or agreement by two or more persons to carry out a
specific or single business enterprise for their mutual benefit, for which purpose they combine
their funds, land res ourc es, facilities and services.
Land Assembly or Consolidation refers to the acquisition of lots of varying ownership through
purchase or expropriation for the purpose of planned and rational development and socialized
housing programs without individual boundary restrictions.
Land Banking refers to the acquisition of land at values based on existing use in advanc e of
actual need to promote planned development and socialized housing programs.
Land Swapping refers to the process of land acquisition by exchanging land for another piece of
land of equal value, or for shares of stock in a government or quasi-government corporation.
Land Use Plan refers to the rational approach of allocating available land resources as equitably
as possible among competing user groups and for different functions consistent with the
development plan of the area and the Program.
On-Site Development refers to the process of upgrading and rehabilitation of blight ed and slum
urban areas with a view of minimizing displacement of dwellers in said areas, and wi th provisions
as provided thereof.
Profe ssional Squatters refers to individuals or groups who occupy lands without the express
consent of the landowner and who have sufficient income for legitimate housing.
Resettlement Areas refers to areas identified by the appropriate national agency or by the local
government unit with respect to areas within its jurisdiction, which shall be used for the relocation
of the underprivileged and homeless citizens.
Security of Tenure refers to the degree of protection afforded to qualified Program beneficiaries
against infringement or unjust, unreasonable and arbitrary eviction or disposition, by virt ue of the
right of ownership, lease agreement, usufruct and other contractual arrangements.
Slum Improvement and Resettlement (SIR) Program refers to the program of the National
Housing Authority of upgrading and improving blight ed squatter areas outside of Metro Manila
pursuant to existing statutes and pertinent executive issuances.
Small Property Owners refers to those whose only real property consists of residential lands not
exceeding 300sqm in highly urbaniz ed areas and 800sqm in other urban areas.
Socialized Housing (s ame as A.O. 353 Def’n)
Squatting Syndicate s refers to groups of persons engaged in the business of squatter housing
for profit or gain.
Underprivileged or Homeless Citizens refers to the beneficiaries of the this Act and to
individuals or families residing in urban and urbanizable areas whose income falls within the
poverty thres hold as defined by NEDA and who do not own housing facilities.
Urban Areas refers to all cities regardless of their population density and to municipalities with a
population density of at least 500 persons per square kilometer.
Urbanizable Areas refers to sites and lands which, considering present characteristics and
prevailing conditions, display marked and great potential of becoming urban areas within the
period of five years.
Zonal Improvement Program (ZIP) refers to the program of t he NHA of upgrading a nd

improving blight ed squatter areas within the cities and municipalities of Metro Manila pursuant to
existing statutes and issuances.
HOUSING. The National Shelter Program is implemented by the HUDCC and other key shelter agencies.
The NSP shall guide LGUs on existing housing policies.
Policy thrusts of NSP include:

1. Housing as a means of social intervention and catalyst for economic for economic
activity.
2. People-centered and aided self-help approach to housing.
3. Ma ximum multi-sectoral participation.
4. Easier land access for housing.
5. Development of regional growth poles.
6. Sustainability and matching of housing finance with beneficiaries’ affordability.
7. Maintenance of ecological balance in urban development and housing.
8. Improvement of housing delivery system.
 RA 7279 mandates gov’t agencies to assist LGUs in the planning & implementation of housing
prog.
P a g e | 6-2 REVIEWER FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING

 RA 7279 requires LGUs to conduct an inventory of lands identifying sites for socialized housing.
TYPES OF BUILDINGS (from NSO)

 Single House – an independent structure intended for one household, separated by open space or
walls
 Duplex – a structure intended for 2 households, with complete housing facilities for each
 Multi-Unit Residentia l – 3 or more units, intended for residential use only, usually consisting of 3
or more housing units.
CLASSIFICATION OF BUILDINGS (NSO)

Under Renovation/Being Repaired
Under Construction
Unfinished Construction
Needs No Repair/Needs Minor Repair
Needs Major Repair
Dilapidated/Condemned
 The year the building was built refers to when construction was completed.
TENURE STATUS OF HOUSE OR LOT

 Owned/Being Amortized – the household is the owner & has the legal possession of the housing
unit
 Rented – occupant pays rent either in cash or in kind
 Occupied for free with consent of owner
 Occupied for free without consent of owner
TYPES OF SUBDIVISION
 Subdivision Project – a tract or a parcel of land registered under RA 496 which is partitioned
primarily for residential purpos es into individual lot with or without improvements thereon, and
offered to the public for sale, in cash or in installment terms.
 Condominium Project – the entire parcel of real property divided or to be divided primarily for
residential purposes into condominium units including all structures thereon.
 Economic and Socialized Housing – housing project for moderately low income families with
lower interest rates and longer amortization periods.
 Open Market Housing – constructed and financed by the private sector as a business venture and
sold at prevailing market prices and interest.
SHELTER NEEDS CATEGORY

New housing units needed to answer the requirements of future generations
New units to cover for housing backlog
Upgrading need
TYPES OF DENSITIES
 Low Density – less than 150 persons per hectare of residential area
 Medium Density – 151 to 250 per ha.
 High Density – more than 250 per ha.
INFRASTRUCTURE NEEDS
1. Potable water
2. Power and electricity and adequate power distribution system
3. Access to primary roads and transport facilities
Subdivision Development
Relevant Terms
Subdivision - Division of a tract or parcel of land into two or more lots, sites or other divisions for
the purpose, whether immediate or future, of a sale or building development. It also includes re-
subdivision.
Subdivision project - S hall mean a t ract or a parcel of land registered under Act No. 496 which is
partitioned primarily for residential purposes into individual lots with or without improvements
thereon, and offered to the public for sale, in cash or in installment terms. It shall include all
residential, commercial, industrial and recreational areas as well as open spaces and other
community and public areas in the project. (PD 957)
Subdivision lot - Any of the lots, whether residential, commercial, industrial, or recreational, in a
subdivision project
Subdivision Development - The conversion of unimproved raw land int o a site that will be capable
of supporting a desired activity and int ended usage, which may be for residential, commercial, or
industrial purposes.
Open space - An area reserved exclusively for parks, playgrounds, recreational us es, schools,
roads, places of worship, hospitals, health cent ers, barangay centers and other similar facili ties
and amenities.
Laws & Issuances

PD 957 (Subdivi sion & Condominium Buyers Protective Decree) - Regulating the S ale of
Subdivision Lots and Condominiums, Providing Penalties For Violations Thereof
PD 1216 (Amending P D 957) - Defining "Open S pace" in Residential Subdivision and Amending
Sec. 31 of PD 957 Requiring Subdivision Owners to Provide Roads, Alleys, Sidewalks and
Reserve Open Spac e for Parks or Recreational Use
PD 1344 - Empowering the NHA to Issue Writ of Execution in the E nforcement of its Decisions
Under P.D. 957
BP 220 - A n Act Authorizing the Ministry of Human Settlements to Establish and Promulgate
Different Levels of Standards and Technical Requirements for Economic and S ocialized Housing
Projects in Urban and Rural Areas from Those Provided Under Presidential Decrees 957, 1216,
1096 & 1185
RA 7279 Urban Development and Housing Act - An Act to Provide For a Comprehensive and
Continuing Urban Development and Housing Program, Establish the Mechanism for its
Implementation, and for Other Purposes
RA 4726 The Condominium Act - An Act to Define Condominium, Establish Requirements for
its Creation, and Govern its Incidents
RA 7899 Amending Sections 4 and 6 oF R.A. 4726 (Condominium Act) - Defined

requirements for amendment/revocation of enabling or master deed of condominium and the
disposal of common areas owned or held by a condominium corporation
RA 6552 Realty Installment Buyer Protection Act - Maceda Law
EO 71 - Devolution of HLURB Function to Approve Subdivision Plan to LGUS
EO 184 - Creating Socialized Housing One-Stop P rocessing Centers

Classification of Subdivisions
As to Complexity
Simple - Development of a parcel of land into two (2) or more lots without need of a road and
open space or playground
Complex - Development of a land into several parcels with varied or similar sizes of lots, with
roads and open spaces provision
According to Use
Residential - Conversion of raw land into safe and serviceable areas for dwellings or permanent
abodes with associated facilities
Commercial - Development of strategically located property for office, retail, wholes ale and
financial activities and also for general services and t ravelers’ needs. Its viability is dependent on
the purchasing power of the supporting population within the area and its accessibility.
Industrial - A tract of land partitioned into plots for sale or lease to establishments engaged
primarily in industrial production or services
Institutional - Devoted to the use of organizations that are charitable, educational, religious , or
the like in nature and character.
Resort or recreational - A planned community where a major part of activity is relaxation or

recreation
Farmlot subdivi sion - A planned community intended primarily for intensive agricult ural activities
and secondarily, for housing
Types of Residential Subdivisions

1. Single-Family Development - Single dwelling unit on each lot with direct access to the
street
2. Detached
3. Attached (e.g. duplex )
4. Multi-Family Development
5. More than one dwelling unit on each building (e.g. tenement housing, multi-level housing)
Development Standards applied – BP 220

Low-Cost Housing Packages
- Level 1-A (Socialized housing) - Price range : Php 400,000 and below (HUDDC MC 1, s.
2008)
- Economic Housing
 Level 1-B – Price range : above Php 400,000 to Php 500,000 (HUDDC MC 1, s. 2008 &
HUDCC MC 5, s. 2007)
 Level 2 – Price range : above Php 500,000 to Php 1,250,000 (HUDCC MC 5, s. 2007)
 Level 3 – Price range : above P hp 1,250,000 to Php 3, 000, 000 (HUDCC MC 5, s. 2007)
Development Standards applied – PD 957
 Medium cost - Price range : Above Php 3,000,000 to Php 4,000,000 (HUDCC MC 5, s.
2007)
 Open market - Price range : Above Php 4,000,000 (HUDCC MC 5, s. 2007)
Types of approval required for development proposal

1. Locational Clearance issued by the Housing and Land Use Regulatory Board for projects of
local, regional and national significance.
2. Building Permit issued by the municipal or district engineer t o proponents of construction
projects who have satisfactorily complied with the requirements as to building standards.
3. Environmental Compliance Certificate issued by the Environmental Management Bureau of
the Department of Environment and Natural Resources (DE NR)
Locational Clearance process

Notice to Public of Proposal
As a prerequisite to locational clearance proc essing, a billboard must be set up on the project site
to serve as a notice to the public. Size of t he billboard and duration of dis play are specified.
Should there be objections from the public, these are forwarded to the HLRB and EMB -DE NR
which may conduct field verification and inspection, the results of which shall have a bearing on
the assessment and evaluation of the application for development permit. Public hearings are
conducted and held to ascertain the validity and veracity of complaints.
Guidelines and Standards for Approval
Guidelines and standards are embodied in the rules and regulations governing the conduct of
clearance and permit issuance.
Decision by Authority
The decision on application is either approved, approved with con ditions, or denied. In the case of
denial, the grounds or bases for denial are enunciated, thus, in some cases, some proponents
are allowed to revise t heir plans to conform wit h regulations and public demand. In the case of
conditional approval, a monitoring feedback system ascertains that conditions are complied with
within the specified period.
Conditions Usually Attached to Locational Clearance
1. No major expansion, alteration and/or improvement shall be introduced thereto without

prior clearance from "this" office.
2. No activity other than that applied for shall be conducted within the project site.
3. Provisions as to setbacks, yard requirements, bulk, easement and others shall strictly
conform with those of the National Building Code and/or the HLRB -approved zoning
ordinance whichever is applicable.
4. A clearance from the EMB-DE NR shall be secured prior to its actual operations.
Conditions attached to Development Permit are varied but center mostly on compliance
with revised or corrected site plan and other corrected specifications clearly marked on
the plans. EMB-DENR also prescribes conditions before actual operation and a separate
monitoring system checks compliance with the set conditions.

Revocation or Modification of Approval
Any complaint against the location and/or pollution of the said project found valid after due
hearing shall be sufficient cause for revoc ation of the clearance. Furthermore, the clearance shall
be considered automatically revoked if not used within specified period from the issuance t hereof.
Alteration of Plan
No owner or developer shall alter the roads, infrastructure and utilities and other forms of
subdivision development as contained in the approved plan and/or represented in its
advertisements without the permission of the HLRB a nd the written conformity or consent of the
duly-organized homeowners association or in the absence of the latter, by the majority of the lot
buyers in the subdivision.
Administrative Review of Decision of Authorities
Any person aggrieved by the decision or action of the application for permit may appeal to the
HLRB Board of Commissioners. Further appeal can be made to the Office of the President.
The following are grounds for filing a motion for reconsideration:
 fraud, accident, mistake or excusable negligence;
 newly -discovered evidence which materially affects the decision rendered; and
 errors of law or irregularities prejudicial to t he substantial rights and interests of the party
adversely affected.
Judicial Review of Decision of Aut hority
 The findings of facts made therein must be respected, so long as they are supported by
substantial evidence, even if not overwhelming or preponderant. It is not for the reviewing
court to weight the c onflicting evidenc e, det ermine the credibility of the witnesses, or
otherwise substitute its judgment for that of the administrative agency on the sufficiency
of the evidence. The administrative decisions in matters within the ex ecutive jurisdiction
can only be set aside on proof of gross abuse of discretion, fraud, or error of law. These
principles negate the power of the reviewing court to re-examine t he sufficiency therein
and do not authorize the court to receive additional evidences that may have not been
submitted to the administrative agency concerned.
Open Space Requirement

For subdivision projects one (1) hectare or more, the owner or developer shall res erve thirty
percent (30%) of the gross area for open spac e. such open space shall have the following
standards allocated exclusively for parks, playgrounds and recreational use:
a. 9% of gross area for high density or social housing (66 to 100 family lot per gross
hectare)
b. 7% of gross area for medium -density or economic housing (21 to 65 family lot per gross
hectare).
c. 3.5 % of gross area low-density or open market housing (20 family lots and below per
gross hectare).
These areas reserved for parks, playgrounds and recreational use shall be non-alienable public
lands, and non-buildable. The plans of the subdivision project shall include t ree planting on such
parts of the subdivision.
Medium Cost and Open Market Housing
Implementing Rules & Regulations of PD 957, 1216, 1344 and other related laws
Residential subdivision projects shall conform wit h the
1. Minimum design standards set by the IRR of P D 957

2. Applicable LGU zoning ordinances
3. Pertinent provisions of the National Building Code if project is with housing component
Site Criteria
Location
 Conformity with Zoning Ordinance/Comprehensive Land Use Plan
o Subdivision projects shall be located in residential zones or ot her areas appropriate
for residential uses.
 If there is no Zoning Ordinance or approved Comprehensive Land Us e Plan, the
dominant land use principle and site suitability factors cited herein shall be used in
determining suitability of a project.
 Subdivision projects supportive of other major urban activities (e.g. housing for industrial
work ers) may be allowed in area zoned for the said urban activities.
Physical Suitability
 Subdivision projects shall be located within suit able sites for housing and outside hazard
prone areas and protection areas as provided for by pertinent laws.
 Critical areas (e. g. areas subject to flooding, landslides and those with unstable soil) must
be avoided.
 The site shall be stable enough to accommodate foundation load without ex cessive
earthmoving, grading or cutting and filling.
Acce ssi bility

 The site must be served by a road that is readily accessible to public transportation lines.
 Access road shall conform with the standards s et in P D 957 IRR to accommodate
expected demand caused by the development of the area.
 In no case shall a subdivision project be approved without the nec essary access
road/right-of-way.
 Access road right-of-way may be constructed either by the developer or the local
government unit.
PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS
Area Planning
 Planning and designing of subdivision projects shall take into account the following:
o safety and general welfare of the fut ure occupants;
o adequate, safe, efficient and integrative road circulation system servicing every lot
therein;
o judicious allocation of land uses for diversity and amenity;
o preservation of site;
o proper siting or orientation of lots;
o harmony with existing and proposed development in the vicinity;
o application of work able design principles or parameters for a well planned and self-
sustaining environment.
 When a developer or planner submits a Planned Unit Development (P UD) type of project,
the layout shall likewise conform to the standards for residential/condominium projects.
Open spaces
Open spaces shall conform with the provisions of P.D. 1216 and its implementing rules and shall
include the following:
 Streets - adequate and safe means of vehicular and pedestrian circulation and
easements for utilities and planting strips, shall be provided.
 Walks - paved walks shall be provided to the living units from streets, parking spac es and
from living units to play areas.
 Parks and play ground - suitable recreational area(s) shall be allocated within the
subdivision.
o Where applicable, a hierarchy of such rec reational areas may be provided for, such
that, a strategically located main park area is supplement ed or complemented by one
or more smaller pocket(s) or areas for recreational use.
o These areas must be accessible to living units and free from any form of haz ard or
risk.
o Said parks and play grounds shall be cleared and free from any debris.
o Parks and playgrounds as much as possible shall be at street level.
Facilities and Amenities

Areas required for subdivision facilities and amenities shall be judiciously allocat ed in acco rdance
with the provisions specified
Density
 Density of subdivision projects shall conform with the residential densities set forth in the
zoning ordinance of the city/municipality where project is located.
 Where there is a mixture of housing types wit hin the subdivision (such as single-
detached, row house, town houses, etc.), density shall include the total number of
dwelling units in multi-storey structure plus the total number of lots intended for single
and semi-det ached hous es.

Site Preservation
Slope
 The finished grade shall have a desired slope to allow rain water to be channeled into
street drains. Where cut and fill is necessary an appropriate grade shall be attained to
prevent any depression in the area.
 Grading and ditching shall be executed in a manner that will prevent erosion or flooding
of adjoining properties.
Preservation of Site Assets

 Suitable t rees with a caliper diameter of 200 millimeters or more, shrubs and desirable
ground cover per DE NR rules shall be preserved.
 Where a good quality top soil exists in the site it shall be banked and shall be preserved
for finishing grades of yards, playgrounds, parks and garden area.
Ground Cover
Grass, shrubs, plants and other landscaping mat erials us ed for ground cover shall be of a variety
appropriate for its intended use and location. They shall be planted so as to allow well-t ended
cover of the area.
Easements
Subdivision projects shall obs erve and c onform to the provisions on eas ements as may be
required by:
 Water bodies - Chapter IV, Section 51 of The Water Code;
 Transmission lines - National Power Corporation (NPC),;
 Identified fault traces - PHIVOLCS per Resolution No. 515, Series of 1992;
 Other public utility companies and other entities' right-of-way.
 National/local government units - for projects abutting national roads (primary roads)
where adequate easement shall be provided for, including loading and unloading areas.
 Other related laws
Circulation
Road network
 Should result into a hierarchy of functions and should define and serve the subdivision as
one integrated unit.
 Roads & pathwalks aligned - to facilitate movement and to link the subdivision to the
nearest major transportation route and/or adjacent property
 Existing roads improved in accordance wit h the standards set in the IRR
Streets
 Should conform to the contours of the land as far as practicable.
 Proposed project adjoins a developed property - roads connected/ int egrated/ aligned
with existing ones
 Proposed project adjoins undeveloped property - provision for future connection is
mandatory.
 As far as practicable, streets shall be laid out at right angles to minimize c ritical
intersections such as blind corners, skew junction, etc.
 Roads shall conform to sound engineering practices.
 Comply with BP 344 (Accessibility Law)
Installation of Street Names/Signs

The developer shall bear the cost of installation of street names/signs coincident with the
construction of streets
DESIGN P ARAMETERS
Land Allocation
For open market and medium cost subdivision projects with an area of one (1) hectare or more,
the percentage (%) allocation of land shall be as follows:
 saleable area - maximum of 70% of the gross area

 non-saleable area - minimum of 30% of the gross area.
Parks and Playgrounds

 Non-buildable area
 Allocation mandatory for projects 1 hectare or more
 Should be strategically located
 Area allocated not less than 100 square meters
Community Facilities
 Mandatory provision of areas for community facilities for areas 1 ha. & above

No. of Convenience
Saleable Neigborhood Store s &
Lots and/or Multi- Other
dwelling Purpose Commercial Elementary High Tricycle
uniut Center* Centers** School** School** Terminals**
10 & below
11 – 99
100 – 499 x
500 -999 x
1000 – 1499 x
1500 – 1999 x x x x
2000 -2499 x x x x x
2500 & over x x x x x
* Mandatory non-saleable
** Optional saleable but when provided in the plan, the same shall be annotated in the titel
 Developer may provide additional areas for community facilities in excess of the
mandatory requirement - deemed saleable
Hierarchy of Roads
 In no case shall a major road be less than 10 meters when used as main access road
and/or as fut ure connection
 Maintain uniform width of road ROW in major roads
Major Road - a street or road linking the site and serves as t he main traf fic artery within
the project site and shall traverse the longer axis of the property.
Collector Road - a street or a road that services pedestrian/ vehicular traffic from minor
roads leading to major roads.
Minor Road - a road whic h main function is to provide direct access to lots and other
activity centers.
Motor Courts - s hall have a right-of-way of not less than 6 meters in width with provision
for sufficient space for vehicular turn around in the form of a cul-de-sac, loop, branch or
"T", with a maximum length of 60 meters inclusive of terminal.
Service Roads - roads which provide for t he distribution of traffic among individual lots
and activity centers.
Alley - a 3-meter wide walk way whic h shall be used to break a block and to serve
pedestrians and for emergency purposes. It shall not be used as access to property.

Carriageway - the part of a road used by vehicular traffic
Right-of-way - Any strip or area of land, including surface and overhead or underground spac e,
which is granted by deed or easement for the construction and maintenance of specified linear
elements such as power and telephone lines; roadways; gas, oil, water, and other pipelines;
sewers.
In no case shall a major road be less than 10 meters when used as main access roa d and/or as
future connection.
Road Right-of-Way (ROW)

 Interior subdivision must secure ROW to nearest public road and ROW shall be
designated as interconnecting road wit h a minimum width of 10 meters; road lot must be
annotated on title lot
 Road lot must be donat ed and deemed t urned over to t he LGU upon completion of the
said interconnecting road
Lot Requirements
Lot Layout
 Preserve site assets
 Proper siting orientation of lots
 Blending with existing & proposed development in the vicinity
 Application of workable design principles/ parameters for a well -planned environment
Minimum Lot Area

 Saleable lots designated as duplex/single attached and/ or rowhouse lots - provide with
housing units
 Price of saleable lots intended for single-detached units – NMT 40% of the maximum
selling price of house & lot packages
Lot Design
 Saleable lots designed such that they are not bisected by political boundaries
 Lots shall be planned wit h adequate width for side yards
 Lots shall be protected against risks
 Lots shall not be laid out if potential risks exist (e.g. erosion, slides, flooding, fault lines,
etc.)
Lot Frontage
The number of rowhouses shall not exceed 20 units per block/cluster but in no cas e shall t his be
beyond 100 meters in length
Length of Block
 Maximum length 400 meters
 Blocks exceeding 250 meters – provide with alley approximat ely at mid-length
Shelter Component
 Minimum floor area
o Open Market Housing – 42 sq.m.
o Medium Cost Housing – 30 sq.m.
 Minimum level of completion - complete house for all types of dwelling units bas ed on
submitted specifications
 Firewall provision – conform with Fire Code; Mandat ory for duplex es/single attached
units and every unit for rowhous es
 Yard/Setback
 Conform to National Building Code
Water Supply System

 Mandatory connection to appropriate public water system or community system
 Public water system or community system not available – centralized water system
accepted
 E very dwelling unit shall be served by an individual supply of water sufficient to meet the
total hourly domestic needs of every household for any 8 hour period
Water Requirements
 A verage Daily Demand (A DD) - 150 liters per capita per day (LPCP D)
 Fire Prot ection Demand – comply with National Fire Protection Code
 Water Tack Capacity – 20% ADD plus fire reserve
 Pipes – conform to standards of Metropolit an Waterworks & Sewerage System (MWSS)
and/or Local Water Utilities Administration (LWUA )
Electrical Power Supply System

 Mandatory individual HH connection to primary and/or alternative sources of power
 Installation practices, materials and fixtures used - in accordance with P hilippine
Electrical Code and/or local utility company.
 Provision of street lighting per pole is mandatory at 50 -meter distance and every other
pole if distance is less than 50 meters.

 Electrical bills for streetlights shall be proportionately shouldered by the users thereof
prior to issuance of Certificate of Completion (COC) and turn -over of open space to LGU.
Sewage Disposal System

 May either be: connection to Community Sewer System - per Sanitation Code of the
Philippines and other applicable rules and regulations , or
 Where community sewer system is not available, sewage shall be disposed of and
treated in individual septic tanks. – conform with Sanitation Code (P D 856) and National
Plumbing Code of The Philippines (RA 1378).
Drainage System
 Conform with the natural drainage pattern of the subdivision site, and shall drain into
appropriate water bodies or public drainage system.
 In no case shall drainage outfalls drain into a private lot.
 Its layout shall conform with sound engineering design/ principles certified by a duly
licensed civil/sanitary engineer.
 Drain lines shall be of durable materials and approved installation practices.
 Underground drainage system shall be properly engineered and environmentally sound
and shall be provided with adequate Reinforced Concrete Pipes (RCP), c atch basins
manholes, inlets and cross drain for efficient maintenance.
 Minimum drainage pipes diameter shall be 30 centimeters.
Garbage Disposal System

The subdivision shall have a sanitary and efficient refuse collection and dis posal system, whether
independently or in conjunction with the municipal/city garbage collection and disposal services.
Economic Housing and Socialized Housing
RELEVANT LAWS & ISSUANCES

BP 220 (1982) - Authorizing HLURB to Prepare IRR for Economic & Socialized Housing Projects
PD 957 (1976) - Subdivision & Condominium Buy ers Protection Decree
PD 1096 (1977) - National Building Code of the Philippines
PD 1216 (1977) - Defining “Open Space” in Residential Subdivisions
PD 1185 (1977) - Fire Code of the Philippines
REVISED DEFINITION OF HOUSING LOAN P ACKAGES

HUDCC Circular Letter dated March 31, 1999
Socialized housing refers to housing programs and projects covering houses and lots or home
lots only undertak en by the Government or the private sector for the underprivileged and
homeless citizens which shall include sites and services development, long -term financing,
liberalized terms on interest payments, and s uch other benefits in accordance with the provisions
of R. A. No. 7279 (Urban Development and Housing Act).
Economic and socialized housing refers to housing units which are within the affordability level of
the average and low-income earners, which is thirty perc ent (30%) of the gross family income as
determined by the National Economic Development Aut hority from time to time. It also refers to
the government-initiated sites and services development and construction of economic and
socialized housing projects in depressed areas.
DESIGN STANDARDS
Development of economic & socialized housing projects shall conform with the
 Minimum design standards set by the IRRs for BP 220

 Applicable LGU zoning ordinances
 Pertinent provisions of the National Building Code if project is with housing component
PARAMETERS USED IN FORMULATING STANDARDS

1. Protection and safety of life, limb, property and general public welfare
2. Basic Needs of Human Settlements (in descending order)
a. Water
b. Movement & circulation
c. Storm drainage
d. Solid & liquid waste disposal
e. Park/playground
f. Power
AFFORDABILITY LEVELS OF TARGET M ARKETS

Affordable Cost – refers to the most reasonable price of land and shelter based on the needs and
financial capabilities of P rogram Beneficiaries and Appropriate Financing Schemes (RA 7279)
LOCATION
Both economic and socialized housing projects shall be located within suitable site for housing
and outside potential hazard prone and prot ection area
TECHNICAL G UIDELINES AND STANDARDS

Site Criteria
Availability of basic needs
The prioritized basic needs shall preferably be available with reasonable distance from the project
site; if not, developer shall provide
Conformity with the Zoning Ordinance or Land Use Plan of the

City/Municipality
 No CLUP or ZO – the predominant land use principle and site suitability factors cited
shall be used to determine site suitability
 if the project is undoubtedly supportive of other land uses and activities ( e.g., housing for
industrial workers) said project shall be allowed
Physical Suitability
A potential site must have characteristics assuring healthful, safe and environmentally sound
community life. It shall be stable enough to accommodate foundation load without excessive site
works. Critical areas (e.g., areas subject to flooding, landslides and stress) must be avoided.
Accessibility
The site must be served by a road that is readily accessible t o public transportation lines. Said
access road shall conform to the standards set by these Rules t o accommodate expected
demand caused by the development of the area. In no case shall a subdivision project be
approved without necessary access road/right-of-way constructed either by the developer or the
Local Government Unit
Planning Considerations
1. Area Planning

 Project design should consider not only the reduction of cost of development to a
minimum but also the provision for possible future improvement or expansion, as in the
prescription of lot sizes, right-of-way of roads, open space, alloc ation of areas for
common uses and facilities'
 Land allocation and alignment of the various utilities (roads, drainage, power and water)
of the subdivision shall be integrated with those of existing networks as well as projects
outside the boundaries of the project site, e.g. access roads set forth herein and should
follow the standard specifications of the DPWH.
2. Site Preservation (same as for Open Mark et/Medium -Cost Housing)
3. Easements (same as for Open Market/Medium-Cost Housing)
4. Circulation (same as for Open Market/Medium-Cost Housing)
DESIGN P ARAMETERS
Land Allocation
Saleable Areas
There shall be no fixed ratio bet ween the s aleable portion and non-saleable portion of a
subdivision project.
Non-saleable Areas
Non-saleable areas shall conform with the minimum requirements for open space comprising
those allotted for circulation system, community facilities & parks/playgrounds
Parks and Playgrounds

 Allocation mandatory for projects 1 hectare or more
 Should be strategically located
 Non- alienable & non-buildable for community hall but buildable for basketball court
 Exclusive of areas allocated for community facilities
 Not less than 100 sq.m.; additional 1% for every increment of 10 above 225 housing units
or fraction thereof
 The site should not be subject to flooding or situated in steep slopes;
 Sites potentially hazardous or dangerous the health and s afety of users, esp. children,
should be avoided (along rivers, near dumping site, etc.)
Community Facilities
 Mandatory provision of areas for community facilities for areas 1 ha. & above
 Developer may provide additional areas for community facilities in excess of the
mandatory requirement - deemed saleable
 Community facilities shall be strategically loc ated and easily accessible where t hey can
serve a maximum number of population, preferably near or side by side of
park/play ground.
 The area allocated for community facilities shall vary wit h the density of the subdivision,
i.e., number of lots and/or dwelling units whichever is applicable, as shown below:
Circulation System
 The area allocated for circulation system shall not be fixed, as long as the prescribed
dimension and requirements for access (both for project site and dwelling units) as
specified in these Rules are complied with.
 Land circulation system shall comply with the pertinent requirements of BP 344
(Accessibility Law).
Planning considerations to be observed for layout:

 Observance of the hierarchy of roads within the subdivision.
 Conformance to nat ural topography.
 Consideration for access and safety, e .g., adequate radius, minimum number of roads at
intersections, moderate slope/grade, adequate sight distance, no blind corners, etc.
 Optimization as to number of lots to lessen area for roads at the same time enhanc es
community interaction
Circulation
 Contiguous projects or projects to be developed by phases - provide with interconnecting
roads with a minimum ROW of 10. 0 meters. (Approved as per HLURB Resolution No.
R-374 dated 03 March 1987)
 Pathwalk - width of 3.0 meters intended only to provide pedestrian access to property for
socialized housing projects; maximum length - 60 meters.
 Major road to s erve as int erconnecting road – 15-cm mix gravel (pit run) as basecourse
on well-compacted subgrade

Pavement
 Major, minor, motorcourt – asphalt
 Sidewalk, alley - macadam
Lot Requirement
Minimum Lot Area
Type of Housing Economic (sq.m.) Socialized (sq.m.)
Single detached 72 64
Duplex/ Single-attached 54 48
Rowhouse 36 32
 Saleable lots designated as duplex/single attached and/ or rowhouse lots - provide with
housing units
 Price of saleable lots intended for single-detached units – NMT 40% of the maximum
selling price of house & lot package
 The number of rowhouses shall not exceed 20 units per block/cluster but in no case shall
this be beyond 100 meters in length
Shelter Component
Minimum floor area for single-family dwelling
 Economic Housing – 22 sq.m.
 Socialized Housing –18 sq.m.
Minimum level of completion

 Economic Housing - complete hous e for all types of dwelling units based on s ubmitted
specifications
 Socialized Housing – shell house with doors and windows to enclose the unit
Firewall provision
Conform to Fire Code; mandat ory for duplexes/single attached units and every unit for rowhouses
Water Requirements
 A verage Daily Demand (A DD) - 150 liters per capita per day (LPCP D)
 Each subdivision must have at least an operational deepwell and pump sets with
sufficient capacity to provide ADD to all homeowners provided a spare pump and motor
set is reserved
 Comply with LWUA standards
 Obtain required permits from the National Water Resources Board (NWRB)
 Multi-storey building – provide with wat er tank if the height of the building requires
pressure in excess of that in the main water line. Capacity - 20% ADD plus fire reserve
 Subdivision may put up ground reservoir (allocated as community facilities) – buffer of 25
meters from possible sourc e of pollution
 If elevated reservoir/water tank - 20% ADD plus fire reserve
 Alternative sources of water supply may be availed of such as collected rain wat er and
other devices with water impounding capacity
 Fire Prot ection Demand – comply with National Fire Protection Code; if applicable, LGU
to provide each community w/ fire hydrant & cistern which are operational at all times
Electrical Power Supply System

 Required when power is available
 Actual connection may depend on the minimum number of users as require d by the
powers supplier
Sewage Disposal System

 Either Communal or individual septic tank conforming to Sanitation Code
 Connection to Community Sewer System, whenever applicable, per S anitation Code of
the Philippines and other applicable rules and regulations
Drainage System
 Consider existing development of adjacent areas relative to t heir impact/effect on the
proposed drainage system, if any
 Minimum drainage system – concrete lined canal with load bearing cover
 Non-existence of drainage system in locality – owner/developer provides catchment area
for drainage discharge in consultation with LGU or private entities concerned;
owner/developer makes it safe & maintains it
Garbage Disposal System

 Undertak en by LGU or in absenc e thereof, by individual lot owners or homeowners
association (HOA) with proper obs ervance of sanitary practices & methods
Firefighting
 HOA shall form fire brigade in collaboration wit h barangay fire brigade. Water for
firefighting shall be part of the wat er supply requirements and shall c omply with the
requirements of the local district unit of the Philippine National Police

Module 7. RA 7279 Urban
Development and
Housing Act (1992)
URBAN DEVELOPMENT AND HOUSING ACT (UDHA)
Provides for a comprehensive and continuing urban development and housing program and
established the mechanism for its implementation
Outlines a three point agenda:
 Fostering people’s participation in the urban development process,
 Empowerment of LGUs to address urban development issues particularly homelessness,
and
 Privat e sector participation in the national shelter program in exchange for incentives
(i.e., UDHA requires developers to set aside 20% of all proposed subdivision areas for
socialized housing).
ECOLOGICAL BALANCE
 LGUs shall coordinate with the DENR in taking measu res that will plan and regulate
urban activities for the conservation and protection of vital, unique and sensitive
ecosystems, scenic landscapes, cultural sites and ot her similar resource areas.
 Active participation of the citizenry in environment al rehabilitation and in decision-making
process shall be promoted and encouraged.
 LGUS to recommend to the Environment and Management Bureau the immediate
closure of factories, mines and transport companies which are found to be causing
massive pollution.
URBAN- RURAL I NTERDEPENDENCE

To minimize rural to urban migration and pursue urban decent ralization, the local government
units shall coordinat e wit h the National Economic and Development A uthority and other
government agencies in the formulation of national development programs that will stimulate
economic growth and promote socioeconomic development in the count ryside.
URBAN RENEWAL AND RESETTLEMENT
 Include the rehabilitation and development of blighted and slum areas and the
resettlement of Program beneficiaries in accordance with the provisions of this Act.
 On-site development shall be implement ed whenever possible in order to ensure
minimum movement of occupants of blighted lands and slum areas.
 The resettlement of the beneficiaries of the P rogram from thei r existing places of
occupancy shall be undertaken only when on-site development is not feasible and after
compliance with the procedures laid down in Section 28 of this Act.
EXPROPRIATION OF IDLE LAND

All idle lands in urban and urbanizable areas shall be expropriated and shall form part of the
public domain.
These lands shall be disposed of or utilized by the Government for such purpos es that conform
with their land us e plans.
Expropriation proceedings shall be instituted if, after t he lapse of one (1) year following receipt of
notice of acquisition, the owner fails to introduce improvements, except in the case of force
majeure and other fortuitous events.
Exempted - ownership of which is subject of a pending litigation.
SOCIALIZED HOUSING
Refers to housing programs and projects covering houses and lots or homelots only undertaken
by the Government or the private sector for the underprivileged and homeless citizens which shall
include sites and services development, long -term financing, liberalized t erms on interest
payments, and such other benefits in accordance with the provisions of UDHA.
Primary strategy in providing shelter for the underpri vileged and homeless
Priorities in the Acquisition of Land for Socialized Housing

Lands for socialized housing shall be acquired in the following order:
1. Those owned by the Government or any of its subdivisions, instrumentalities, or

agencies, including government-owned or controlled corporations and their subsidiaries;
2. Alienable lands of the public domain;
3. Unregistered or abandoned and idle lands;
4. Those within the declared A reas for Priority Development, Zonal Improvement Program
sites, and Slum Improvement and Resettlement Program sites which have not yet been
acquired;
5. Bagong Lipunan Improvement of Sites and Services or BLISS sites which have not yet
been acquired; and
6. Privat ely-owned lands.

Where on-site development is found more practicable and advant ageous to the beneficiaries, the
priorities mentioned in this section shall not apply. The local government units shall give
budgetary priority to on-site development of government lands.
Modes of Land Acquisition

The modes of acquiring lands shall include, among others, community mortgage, land s wapping,
land assembly or consolidation, land banking, donation to the Government, joint-venture
agreement, negotiated purc hase, and expropriation: Provided, however,
 Expropriation shall be resorted to only when other modes of ac quisition have been
exhausted
 Parcels of land owned by small property owners shall be exempted
 Abandoned property shall be reverted and escheat ed to the State in a proceeding
analogous to the procedure laid down in Rule 91 of the Rules of Court.
Right of First Refusal

For the purpose of socialized housing, government-owned and foreclosed properties shall be
acquired by the local government units, or by the National Housing Authority primarily through
negotiated purchase: Provided, that qualified beneficiaries who are actual occupants of the land
shall be given the right of first refusal.
Right of First Refusal - a contractual right granted by the owner of something, that gives the
holder of the right an option to enter a business transaction with the owner, according to
specified terms, before the owner is entitled to enter that transaction with a third party
Disposition of Lands for Socialized Housing

NHA, with respect to lands belonging to the National Government, and the LGUs with respect to
other lands within their respective localities, shall coordinate wit h each other to formulate and
make available various alternative schemes for the disposition of lands to the beneficiaries of the
Program.
Schemes
 transfer of ownership in fee simple
 lease, with option to purchase,
 usufruct or
 such other variations as the LGU or the NHA may deem most expedient in carrying out
the purposes of this Act.
Consistent with this provision, a scheme for public rental housing may be adopt ed.
Limitations on the Disposition of Lands for Socialized Housing

 No land for socialized housing, including improvements o r rights thereon, shall be sold,
alienated, conveyed, encumbered or leased by any beneficiary of this P rogram except to
qualified Program beneficiaries as det ermined by the government agency concerned.
 Should the beneficiary unlawfully sell, transfer, or otherwise dispose of his lot or any right
thereon, the transaction shall be null and void.
 He shall also lose his right to the land, forfeit the total amortization paid thereon, and shall
be barred from t he benefits under this Act for a period of ten (10) y ears from the date of
violation.
 In the event the beneficiary dies before full ownership of the land is vested on him,
transfer to his heirs shall take place only upon t heir assumption of his outstanding
obligations.
 In case of failure by the heirs to assume such obligations, the land shall revert to the
Government for disposition in accordance with this Act.
BALANCED HOUSING DEVELOPMENT

Developers of proposed subdivision projects shall be required to develop an area for socialized
housing equivalent to at least twenty percent (20%) of the t otal subdivision area or total
subdivision project cost, at the option of the developer, within the same city or municipality,
whenever feasible, and in accordance with the standards set by the HLURB and other existing
laws.
The balanced housing development equired may also be complied with by the developers
concerned in any of the following manner:
 Development of new settlement;
 Slum upgrading or renewal of areas for priority development either through zonal
improvement programs or slum improvement and resettlement programs;
 Joint -venture projects with either the local government units or any of the housing
agencies; or
 Participation in the community mortgage program.
Incentives for Private Sector Participating in Socialized Housing

 Reduction and simplification of qualification and accreditation requirements for
participating privat e developers;
 Creation of one-stop offices in the different regions of the country for the processing,
approval and issuance of clearanc es, permits and licens es: Provided, That clearances,
permits and licenses shall be issued wit hin ninety (90) days from t he date of submission
of all requirements by the participating private developers;
 Simplification of financing procedures; and
 Exemption from the payment of the following:
o Project-related income taxes;
o Capital gains tax on raw lands use for the project;
o Value-added tax for the project concerned;
o Transfer tax for both raw and completed projects; and
o Donor’ s tax for bot h lands certified by the local government units to have been
donated for socialized housing purposes.

Upon application for exemption
 a lien on that title of the land shall be annotated by the Register of Deeds:
 socialized housing development plan has already been approved by the appropriate
government agencies concerned:
All the savings acquired by virtue of this provision shall accrue in favor of the beneficiaries subject
to the implementing guidelines to be issued by the HUDCC.
Incentives to Property Owners

Property owners who voluntarily provide resettlement sites to illegal occupants of their lands shall
be entitled to a tax credit equivalent to the actual non-recoverable expenses incurred in the
resettlement, subject to the implementing guidelines jointly issued by the HUDCC and the
Department of Finance.
Socialized Housing Tax

Consistent with the constitutional principle t hat the ownership and enjoyment pf property bear a
social function and to raise funds from the Program, all local government units are hereby
authorized to i mpose an additional one-half percent (0.5%) t ax on the assessed value of all lands
in urban areas in excess of Fifty thousand pes os (P50,000).
Promotion of Indigenous Housing Materials and Technologies

The local government units, in cooperation with the National Housing Authority, Technology and
Livelihood Resource Center, and other concerned agencies, shall promote the production and
use of indigenous, alternative, and low-cost construction materials and technologies for socialized
housing.
Basic Services
Socialized housing or resettlement areas shall be provided by the LGU or the NHA in cooperation
with the private developers and concerned agencies with the following basic services and
facilities:
 Potable water;
 Power and electricity and an adequate power distribution system;
 Sewerage facilities and an efficient and adequate solid waste disposal system; and
 Access to primary roads and transportation facilities.
Provision of Other Basic Services

Provision of other basic servic es and facilities such as heal th, education, communication,
security, recreation, relief and welfare shall be planned and shall be given priority for
implementation by the local government unit and concerned agencies in cooperation with the
private sector and the beneficiaries themselves.
Action Against Professional Squatters and Squatting Syndicates

 The local government units, in cooperation with t he Philippine National Police, the
Presidential Commission for the Urban Poor (PCUP), and the P CUP -accredited urban
poor organization in the area, shall adopt measures to identify and effectively curtail the
nefarious and illegal activities of professional squatters and squatting syndicates, as
herein defined.
 Any person or group identified as such shall be summarily evicted and their dwellings or
structures demolished, and shall be disqualified to avail of the benefits of the Program.
 A public official who tolerates or abets the commission of the abovementioned acts shall
be dealt with in accordance with existing laws.
Penalties for Professional Squatters

Professional squatters or members of squatting syndicat es shall be imposed the penalty of six (6)
years imprisonment or a fine of not less than Sixty thousand pesos (P60, 000) but not more than
One hundred thousand pesos (P100,000), or both, at the discretion of the court.
Eviction and Demolition

E viction or demolition as a practice shall be discouraged. E viction or demolition, however, may be
allowed under the following situations:
 When pers ons or entities occupy danger areas such as esteros, railroad tracks, garbage
dumps, riverbanks, shorelines, waterways, and other public places such as sidewalks,
roads, parks, and playgrounds;
 When government infrastructure projects with available funding are about to be
implemented; or
 When there is a court order for eviction and demolition.
Mandatory Requirements in the Execution of Eviction or Demolition

In t he execution of eviction or demolition orders involving underprivileged and homeless citizens,
the following shall be mandatory:
1. Notice upon t he effected persons or entities at least thirty (30) days prior to the date of
eviction or demolition;
2. Adequate consultations on the matter of res ettlement with the duly designated
representatives of the families to be res ettled and the affected communities in the areas
where they are to be relocated;
3. Presence of local government officials or their repres entatives during eviction or
demolition;
4. Proper identification of all persons taking part in the demolition;
5. Execution of eviction or demolition only during reg ular office hours from Mondays to
Fridays and during good weather, unless the affected families consent otherwise;
6. No use of heavy equipment for demolition except for structures that are permanent and of
concrete mat erials;
7. Proper uniforms for members of the Philippine National Police who shall occupy the first
line of law enforc ement and observe proper disturbance cont rol procedures; and
8. Adequate relocation, whether temporary or permanent: Provided, however, That in cas es
of eviction and demolition pursuant to a court order involving underprivileged and
homeless citizens, relocation shall be undertaken by the local government unit conc erned
and the National Housing Authority with the assistance of ot her government agencies
within forty-five (45) days from service of notice of final judgment by the court, after which
period the said order shall be executed: Provided, further, That should relocation not be
possible within the said period, financial assistance in the amount equivalent to the
prevailing minimum daily wage multiplied by sixty (60) days shall be extended to the
affected families by the local government unit concerned.

DILG and the HUDCC shall jointly promulgat e the necessary rules and regulations to carry out
the above provision.
Prohibition Against New Illegal Structures

It shall be unlawful for any person to construct any structure in in danger areas such as esteros,
railroad tracks, garbage dumps, riverbanks, shorelines, waterways, and in other public places
such as sidewalks, roads, parks and playgrounds
The barangay, municipal or city government units shall prevent the construction of any kind or
illegal dwelling units or structures within their respective localities.
The head of any loc al government unit concerned who allows, abets or other wise t olerates the
construction of any structure in violation of this section shall be liable to administrative sanctions
under existing laws and to penal sanctions provided for in this Act.
COMMUNITY M ORTGAGE PROGRAM

The Community Mortgage Program (CMP ) is a mortgage financing program of the National Home
Mortgage Finance Corporation which assists legally organiz ed associations of underprivileged
and homeless citizens to purchase and develop a tract of land under the concept of community
ownership.
The primary objective of the program is to assist residents of blighted or depre ssed areas to
own the lots they occupy, or where they c hoose to relocate to, and eventually improve their
neighborhood and homes to the extent of their affordability.
Incentives to Participants in the CMP Program

1. Government-owned or cont rolled corporations and local government units, may dispose
of their idle lands suitable for socialized housing under the CMP through negotiated salt
at prices based on acquisition cost plus financial carrying costs;
2. Properties sold under the CMP shall be exempted from the capital gains tax; and
3. Beneficiaries under the CMP shall not be evicted nor dispossessed of their lands or
improvements unless they have incurred arrearages in payments of amortizati ons for
three (3) months.
Organization of Beneficiaries
Beneficiaries of the Program shall be responsible for their organization into associations to
manage their subdivisions or places of residence, to secure housing loans under existing
Community Mortgage Program and such other projects beneficial to them.
Subject to such rules and regulations to be promulgated by the National Home Mortgage Finance
Corporation, associations organized pursuant to this Act may collectively acquire and own lands
covered by this Program.
Where the beneficiaries fail to form an association by and among themselves, the National Home
Mortgage Finance Corporation shall initiate the organization of the same in c oordination with the
Presidential Commission for the Urban Poor and the local government units concerned.
No person who is not a bona fide resident of t he area shall be a member or officer of such
association.
Module 8. Condominiums
LAWS AND ISSUANCES
RA 4726 (1966) "The Condominium Act"
An Act To Define Condominium, Establish Requir ements For Its Creation, And Govern Its
Incidents
PD 957 (2001) “Subdivision and Condominium Buyers Protective Decree”
DEFINITION OF CONDOMINIUM
A condominium is an interest in real property consisting of separate interest in a unit in a
residential, industrial or commercial building and an undivided interest in common, directly or
indirectly, in the land on which it is located and in other common areas of the building. It may
include, in addition, a separate interest in other portions of such real propert y. Oft en c alled
VERTICAL SUBDIVISION.
Relevant Terms
Unit
Means a part of the condominium project intended for any type of independent use or ownership,
including one or more rooms or spaces loc ated in one or more floors (or part or parts of floors) in
a building or buildings and such accessories as may be appended theret o.
Common areas
Means the entire project excepting all units separately granted or held or reserved.
Appurtenance
An incidental right, privilege, etc., attached to some thing and passing with it, as by conveyance
or sale
APPLICATION OF RA 4726
The provisions of this Act shall apply to property divided or to be divided into condominiums only
if an enabling or master deed recorded in the Register of Deeds of the province or city in which
the property lies, and duly annotated in the corresponding certificate of title of the land, if the latter
had been patented or registered under either the Land Registration or Cadastral Acts
CONVERSION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES TO
CONDOMINIUM P ROJECTS
Existing structures may be convert ed into condominium projects upon proper application therefor
with the Board and compliance with the requirements of condominium laws and these rules and
standards.
TITLE AND OWNERSHIP

Title to the common area, may be held by a corporation specially formed for the purpose in which
the holders of separate interest shall automatically be members or shareholders, to the exclusion
of others, in proportion to the appurt enant interest of their respective units in the common areas.
The interest in condominium may be ownership or any other real interest in real property
recognized by the law of property in the Civil Code and ot her pertinent laws.
Contents of Enabling or Master Deed

1. Description of the land on which the building or buildings and improvements are to be
located;
2. Description of the building/s stating the number of storeys and basements, the number of
units and their accessories, if any;
3. Description of the common areas and facilities;
4. A statement of the exact nature of the interest acquired or to be acquired by the purchaser in
the separate units and in the common areas of the condominium project. Where title to or the
appurtenant interest in the common areas is to be held by a condominium corporation, a
statement to this effect shall be included;
5. Statement of the purposes for which the building or buildings and eac h of the units are
intended or restricted as to use;
6. A certificate of the registered owner of the property, if he is other t han those executing the
master deed, as well as of all registered holders of any lien or encumbrance on the property,
that they consent to the registration of the deed;
7. The following plans shall be appended to the deed as integral parts thereof:
 A survey plan of t he land included in the project, unless a survey plan of the
same property had previously been filed in said office;
 A diagrammatic floor plan of the building or buildings each unit, its relative
location and approximate dimensions;
8. Any reasonable restriction not contrary to law, morals or public policy regarding the right of
any condominium owner to alienate or dispose of his condominium.
Amendment or Revocation of Master Deed

RA 7899 amending Section 4, RA 4726
The enabling or master deed may be amended or revoked upon registration of an i nstrument
executed by a simple majority of the registered owners of the property:

 Condominium project exclusively for either residential or commercial us e - simple
majority shall be on a per unit of ownership basis
 Mixed use - simple majority shall be on a floor area of ownership basis
 Prior notifications to all registered owners are done
 Any amendment or revocation already decided by a simple majority of all registered
owners s hall be submitted to t he HLURB and the city/municipal engineer for approval
before it can be registered
 Until registration of a revocation, the provisions of this Act shall continue to apply to such
property”
INCIDENTS OF A CONDOMINIUM GRANT

Unless otherwise expressly provided in the enabling or master deed or the declaration of
restrictions, the incidents of a condominium grant are as follows:
1. The boundary of the unit granted are the interior surfaces of the perimeter walls, floors,
ceilings, windows and doors thereof.
 Not part of the unit granted: bearing walls, columns, floors, roofs, foundations and
other common structural elements of the building; lobbies, stairways, hallways, and
other areas of common use, elevator equipment and shafts, central heating, central
refrigeration and central air conditioning equipment, reservoirs, tanks, pumps and
other central services and facilities, pipes, ducts, flues, chutes, conduits, wires and
other utility installations, wherever locat ed, except the outlets thereof when located
within the unit.
2. There shall pass wit h the unit, as an appurtenance t hereof, an exclusive easement for the
use of the air space encompassed by the boundaries of the unit as it exists at any particular
time and as the unit may lawfully be altered or reconstructed from time to time. Such
easement shall be automatically terminated in any air space upon destruction of the unit as to
render it untenantable.
3. Unless otherwise provided, the c ommon areas are held in common by the holders of units, in
equal shares one for each unit.
4. A non-exclusive easement for ingress, egress and support through the c ommon areas is
appurtenant to each unit and the common areas are subject to such easements.
5. Each condominium owner shall have the exclusive right to paint, repaint, tile, wax, paper or
otherwise refinish and decorate the inner s urfaces of the walls, ceilings, floors, windows and
doors bounding his own unit.
6. Each condominium owner shall have the exclusive right to mortgage, pledge or encumber his
condominium and to have the same appraised independently of the other condominium
owner is personal to him.
7. Each condominium owner has also the absolut e right to sell or dis pose of his condominium
unless the master deed cont ains a requirement that the property be first offered to the
condominium owners within a reasonable period of time be fore the same is offered to outside
parties.
DECLARATION OF RESTRICTIONS
 The owner of a project shall, prior to the conveyance of any condominium therein,
register a declaration of restrictions relating to such project, which restrictions shall
constitute a lien upon each condominium in the project, and shall insure to and bind
all condominium owners in the projects.
 Such liens, unless otherwis e provided, may be enforced by any condominium owner
in the project or by the management body of such project.
 The Register of Deeds shall enter and annotate the declaration of restrictions upon
the certificat e of title covering the land included within the project, if the land is
patent ed or registered under the Land Registration or Cadastral Acts.
Type of Management Bodies

The declaration of restrictions shall provide for the management of the project by anyone of the
following management bodies:
 condominium corporation
 association of the condominium owners
 board of governors elected by condominium owners, or
 management agent elected by the owners or by the board named in the declaration.
It shall also provide for voting majorities quorums, notices, meeting date, and other rules
governing such body or bodies.
Other Provision in Declaration of Restrictions

Such declaration of restrictions, among other things, may also provide:
1. The manner and proc edure for amending such restrictions: Provided, That the vote of not
less than a majority in interest of the owners is obtained.
2. For independent audit of the accounts of the management body;
3. For reasonable assessments to meet authorized expenditures, each condominium unit to
be assessed separately for its share of such expens es
in proportion (unless otherwise provided) to its owners fractional int erest in any common
areas;
4. For the subordination of the liens securing such assessments to other liens either
generally or specifically described;
5. As to any management body;
a. For the power thereof, including power to enforce the provisions of the
declarations of restrictions;
b. For maintenance of insurance policies, insuring condominium owners against
loss by fire, casualty, liability, workmen's compensation and other insurable risks
and for bonding of the members of any management body;
c. Provisions for maint enance, utility, gardening and other services benefiting the
common areas, for the operation of the building, and legal, accounting and other
professional and technical services;

d. For purchase of materials, supplies and the like needed by the common areas;
e. For payment of taxes and special assessments which would be a lien upon the
entire project or common areas, and for discharge of any lien or encumbrance
levied against the entire project or the common areas;
f. For reconstruction of any portion or portions of any damage to or destruction of
the project;
g. The manner for delegation of its powers;
h. For entry by its officers and agents into any unit when necessary in connection
with the maintenanc e or construction for which such body is
responsible;
i. For a power of attorney to the management body to sell the entire project for the
benefit of all of the owners thereof when partition of the project may be
authorized under Section 8 of this Act, which said power shall be binding upon all
of the condominium owners regardless of whether they assume the obligations of
the restrictions or not;
6. For conditions, other than those provided for in Section 8 and 13 of the Condominium
Act, upon which partition of the project and dissolution of the condominium corporation
may be made.
 Such right to partition or dissolution may be conditioned upon failure of the
condominium owners to rebuild within a cert ain period or upon specified percentage
of damage t o the building, or upon a decision of an arbitrator, or upon any other
reasonable condition
PARTITION
 The common areas shall remain undivided, and there shall be no judicial partition thereof.
 Where several persons own condominium in a condominium project, an action may be

brought by one or more such persons for partition thereof by sale of the entire project, as
if the owners of all of the condominiums in such project were co-owners of the entire
project in the same proportion as their interests in the common areas :
A partition shall be made only upon a showing:

1. That 3 y ears aft er damage or destruction to the project which renders a material part
thereof unfit for its use prior thereto, the project has not been rebuilt or repaired
substantially to its state prior to its damage or destruction, or
2. That damage or destruction to the project has rendered one-half or more of the units
therein untenantable and that condominium owners holding in aggregate more than
thirty percent interest in the common areas are opposed to repair or restoration of the
project; or
3. That the project has been in existence in excess of 50 years, that it is obsolete and
uneconomic, and that condominium owners holding in aggregate more t han fifty
percent interest in the common areas are opposed to repair or restoration or
remodelling or modernizing of the project; or
4. That the project or a material part thereof has been condemned or expropriated and
that the project is no longer viable, or that the condominium owners holding in
aggregate more than seventy percent interest in the common areas are opposed to
continuation of the condominium regime after expropriation or condemnation of a
material portion thereof; or
5. That the conditions for such partition by sale set forth in the declaration of
restrictions, duly registered in accordance with the terms of this Act, have been met.
TRANSFER OR CONVEYANCE
Trans fer or conveyance of a unit or an apartment, office or store or other space therein, shall
include the transfer or conveyance of t he undivided interests in the common areas or, in a proper
case, the membership or shareholdings in the condominium corporation:
 Common areas held by the owners of separate units a s co-owners thereof – no

condominium unit therein shall be conveyed or trans ferred to persons other than Filipino
citizens or corporation at least 60% percent of the capital stock of which belong to Filipino
citizens, except in cases of heredit ary succession.
 Common areas held by a corporation - no transfer or conveyance of a unit shall be
valid if transfer of membership or stockholding will cause the alien interest to exceed the
limits imposed by existing laws. (40% )
CONDOMINIUM CORPORATION
 Whenever the common areas in a condominium project are held by a condominium
corporation, such corporation shall constitute the management body of the project.
 Corporate purposes limited to the holding of the common areas; either in ownership
or any ot her interest in real property recognized by law, to the management of the
project, and to such ot her purposes as may be necessary, incidental or convenient to
the accomplishment of said purpos es.
 The articles of inc orporation or by-laws of the corporation shall not contain any
provision cont rary to or inconsistent with the provisions of this Act, the enabling or
master deed, or the declaration of restrictions of the project.
 Membership in a condominium corporation, regardless of whether it is a stock or non-
stock corporation, shall not be trans ferable separately from the condominium unit of
which it is an appurtenance.
 When a member or stockholder ceases to own a unit in the project in which the
condominium corporation owns or holds the common areas, he shall automatically
cease to be a member or stockholder of the condominium corporation.
 Term of corporation - co-terminus wit h the duration of the condominium project, the
provisions of the Corporation Law to the contrary not withstanding.
Involuntary Dissolution of Condominium Corporation

 In case of involuntary dissolution of a condominium corporation for any of t he caus es
provided by law, the common areas owned or held by the corporation shall, by way of
liquidation, be transferred pro-indiviso and in proportion to their interest in the
corporation to the members or stockholders thereof, subject to the superior rights of
the corporation creditors.

 Such trans fer or c onveyance shall be deemed to be a full liquidation of the interest of
such members or stockholders in the corporation.
 After s uch transfer or conveyance, the provisions of this Act governing undivided co-
ownership of, or undivided interest in, the common areas in condominium projects
shall fully apply.
Voluntary Dissolution of Condominium Corporation

Until the enabling or the master deed of the project in which the condominium corporation owns
or holds the common area is revoked, the corporation shall not be volunt arily dissolved through
an action for dissolution under Rule 104 of the Rules of Court except upon a showing:
1. That 3 years after damage or destruction to the project in which the corporation owns or
holds the common areas, which damage or destruction renders a material part thereof
unfit for its use prior thereto, the project has not been rebuilt or repaired substantially to
its state prior to its damage or destruction; or
2. That damage or destruction to the project has rendered one-half or more of the units
therein untenantable and t hat more than 30% percent of the members of the corporation,
if non-stock, or the s hareholders representing more than 30% percent of the capital stock
entitled to vote, if a stock corporation, are opposed to the repair or reconstruction of the
project, or
3. That the project has been in existence in excess of 50 years, that it is obsolete and
uneconomical, and that more than 50% percent of the members of the corporation, if
non-stock, or the stockholders representing more t han 50 percent of the capital stock
entitled to vote, if a stock corporation, are opposed to the repair or restoration or
remodeling or modernizing of the project; or
4. That the project or material part thereof has been condemned or expropriated and that
the project is no longer viable, or that the members holding in aggregate more than 70%
interest in the corporation if non-stock, or the stockholders representing more than 70%
percent of the capital stock entitled to vote, if a stock corporation, are opposed to the
continuation of the condominium regime after expropriation or condemnation of a material
portion thereof; or
5. That the conditions for such a dissolution set fort h in the declaration of restrictions of the
project in which the corporation owns or holds the common areas, have been met.
The condominium corporation may also be dissolved by the affirmative vote of all the
stockholders or members thereof at a general or special meeting duly called for the purpos e:
Provided, That all the requirements of Section 62 of the Corporation Law are complied wi th.
Unless otherwise provided for in the declaration of restrictions upon voluntary dissolution of a
condominium corporation in accordance with t he provisions of S ections 13 and 14 of this Act, the
corporation shall be deemed to hold a power of attorney from all the members or stockholders to
sell and dis pose of their separate interests in the project and liquidation of the corporation shall
be effected by a sale of the entire project as if the corporation owned the whole thereof, subject to
the rights of the corporate and of individual condominium creditors.
Disposition of Common Areas
RA 7899 amending Section 16, RA 4726
A condominium corporation shall not, during its existence, sell, exchange, lease or otherwise
dispose of the common areas owned or held by it is in the condominium project unless authorized
by the affirmative vot e of a simple majority of registered owners; Provided, that prior notification to
all registered owners be done; Provided further, that the condominium corporation may expand or
integrate the project with another upon the affirmative vote of a simple majority of registered
owners, subject only to the approval of the HLURB.
Liquidation of Member’s Interest

 Any provisions of the Corporation Law to the c ontrary not withstanding, the by-laws of a
condominium corporation shall provide t hat a stockholder or member shall not be entitled
to demand payment of his shares or interest in those cases where such right is granted
under the Corporation Law unless he consents to sell his separate interest in the project
to the corporation or to any purchaser of the corporation's choice who shall also buy from
the corporation the dissenting member or stockholder's interest .
 In cas es of disagreement as to price, the procedure set forth in the appropriat e provision
of the Corporation Law for valuation of shares shall be followed.
 The corporation shall have 2 y ears within which to pay for the shares or furnish a
purchaser of its choice from the time of award.
 All expens es incurred in the liquidation of the interest of the dissenting member or
stockholder shall be borne by him.
Registration of Conveyance
 Upon registration of an instrument conveying a condominium, the Register of Deeds
shall, upon payment of the proper fees, enter and annotate the conveyance on the
certificate of title covering t he land included within the project and the t rans feree shall be
entitled to the issuance of a "condominium owner's" copy of the pertinent portion of such
certificate of title.
 Said "condominium owner's" copy need not reproduce the ownership status or other
condominiums in the project.
 A copy of the description of the land, a brief description of t he condominium c onveyed,
name and personal circumstances of the condominium owner would be sufficient for
purposes of the "condominium owner's" copy of the certificate of title.
 No conveyance of condominiums or part thereof, subsequent to the original conveyance
thereof from the owner of the project, shall be registered unless accompanied by a
certificate of the management body of the project that such conveyance is in accordance
with the provisions of the declaration of restrictions of such project.
 In cases of condominium projects registered under the provisions of the Spanish
Mortgage Law or Act 3344, as amended, the registration of the deed of convey ance of a
condominium shall be sufficient if t he Register of Deeds shall keep the original or signed
copy thereof, together with the certificat e of the management body of the project, and
return a copy of the deed of conveyance to the condominium owner fully acknowledged
and stamped by the Register of Deeds in the s ame manner as in the c ase of registration
of convey ances of real property under said laws.

 Where the enabling or master deed provides that the land included withi n a condominium
project are to be owned in common by the condominium owners therein, the Register of
Deeds may, at the request of all the condominium owners and upon surrender of all their
condominium owner's copies, cancel the certificates of title of the property and issue a
new one in the name of said condominium owners as pro -indiviso co-owners thereof.
ASSESSMENTS
 An assessment upon any condominium made in accordance wit h a duly registered
declaration of restrictions shall be an obligation of the owner thereof at the time the
assessment is made.
 The amount of any such assessment plus any other charges thereon, such as interest,
costs (including attorney 's fees) and penalties, as such may be provided for in the
declaration of restrictions, shall be and become a lien upon causes a notice of
assessment to be registered wit h the Register of Deeds of the city or province where
such condominium project is located.
 The notice shall state the amount of such assessment and such other charges thereon as
may be authorized by the declaration of restrictions, a description of the condominium
unit against which same has been assessed, and the name of the registered owner
thereof.
 Such notice shall be signed by an authorized representative of the management body or
as otherwise provided in the declaration of restrictions.
 Upon payment of said assessment and charges or other satisfaction thereof, the
management body shall cause to be registered a release of the lien.
 Such lien shall be superior to all other liens registered subsequent to the registration of
said notice of assessment except real property tax liens and except that the declaration
of restrictions may provide for the subordination thereof to any other liens and
encumbrances.
Foreclosure
 Assessments may be enforced in the same manner provided for by law for the judicial or
extra-judicial foreclosure of mortgages of real property.
 Unless otherwise provided for in the declaration of restrictions, the management body
shall have power to bid at foreclosure sale.
 The condominium owner shall have the same right of redemption as in cases of judicial
or extra-judicial foreclosure of mortgages.
Lien based on Labor/Services/Materials

 No labor performed or services or materials furnished without the consent of or at the
request of a condominium owner or his agent or his contractor or subcontractor, shall be
the basis of a lien against the condominium of any ot her c ondominium owner, unless
such other owner have expressly consented to or requested the performance of such
labor or furnishing of such materials or services.
 Such express consent shall be deemed to have been given by the owner of any
condominium in the case of emergency repairs of his condominium unit.
 Labor performed or servic es or materials furnished for the common areas, if duly
authorized by the management body provided for in a declaration of restrictions
governing the property, shall be deemed to be performed or furnished with the express
consent of each condominium owner.
 The owner of any c ondominium may remove his condominium from a lien against two of
the lien of the fraction of the total sum secured by such lien which is attributable to his
condominium unit.
Acquisition of Personal Property

 Unless ot herwise provided for by the declaration of restrictions, the management body,
provided for herein, may acquire and hold, for the benefit of the condominium owners,
tangible personal property and may dispose of the same by sale or otherwis e;
 The beneficial interest in such personal property shall be owned by the condominium
owners in the same proportion as their res pective int erests in the common areas.
 A trans fer of a condominium shall transfer t o the transferee ownership of the transferor's
beneficial int erest in such personal property.
REORGANIZATION OF THE P ROJECT

Where, in an action for partition of a condominium corporation on t he ground that the project or a
material part thereof has been condemned or expropriated, the court finds that the conditions
provided in this Act or in the declaration have not been met, the Court may decree a
reorganization of the project declaring
 which portion or portions of the project shall continue as a condominium project,

 the owners thereof, and
 the respective rights of said remaining owners and
 the just compensation, if any, that a condominium owner may be entitled to due to
deprivation of his property.
Upon receipt of a copy of the dec ree, the Register of Deeds shall enter and annotate the same on
the pertinent certificate of title.
Any deed, declaration or plan for a condominium project shall be liberally construed to facilitate
the operation of the project, and its provisions shall be presumed to be independent and
severable.
Whenever real property has been divided into condominiums, each c ondominium separately
owned shall be separately assessed, for purpos es of real property taxation and other tax
purposes, to t he owners thereof and t he tax on each such condominium shall constitute a lien
solely thereon.
DESIGN STANDARDS AND G UIDELINES FOR RESIDENTIAL

CONDOMINIUM P ROJECTS
Presidential Decree No. 957 Subdivision and Condominium Buyers Protective Decree
Site Criteria
Conformity to Comprehensive Land Use Plan/ Zoning Ordinance/ National Building Code
 Residential condominium projects shall preferably be located in areas zoned as or

appropriate for residential uses.
 Condominium projects shall likewise conform wit h the minimum building requirements, lot
occupancy, open spaces, parking and other requirements of the National Building Code
of the Philippines and its Impleme nting Rules and Regulations.
Planning Considerations
1. Area Planning
 Supplement ary and supportive activities to residential use s hall be allowed provided that
the privacy, order, health and safety of the residents are not jeopardized nor threatened
and that the land use plan and/or zoning ordinance of the locality can accommodate such
mixture of land uses.
 Open spaces s hall be provided within the project site purs uant t o the National Building
Code of the Philippines and its Implementing Rules and Regulatio ns. These s hall include
courts, yards, setbacks, light wells, unc overed driveways, access roads, parking spaces,
buffer strips, parks and playgrounds. These spaces shall be open from the ground to the
sky. The open space shall also be allocated for basic utilities and community facilities or
common areas.
 Easements for utilities, such as drainage system, water supply, power lines and
communication lines, shall be integrated with land circulation system.
 Building orientation on lot shall t ake into account proper ventilation, sunlight and land
characteristics.
 No development shall be allowed within the 5 -meter mandatory easement on bot h sides
of the Marikina Valley Fault Trace and such other fault traces as may be identified by
PHIV OLCS. (Approved per HYDCC Board Res. No. 515, Series of 1992)
2. Site Preservation/Alteration
 Slope - The finished grade shall have a desired slope to allow rainwater to be channeled
into street drains. Where cut and fill is necessary an appropriate grade shall be attained
to prevent any depression in the area. Grading and ditching shall be executed in a
manner that will prevent erosion or flooding of adjoining properties.
 Preservation of Site Assets - Suitable trees with a caliper diameter of 200 millimet ers or
more, as well as shrubs and desirable ground cover shall be preserved in accordance
with the implementing rules and regulations of DE NR. Where good quality top soil exists
in the site it shall be banked and shall be preserved for finishing grades of yards,
playgrounds, parks and garden area.
 Ground Cover - Grass, shrubs, plants and ot her landscaping materials us ed for ground
cover shall be of variety appropriat e for its intended use and location. They shall be so
planted as to allow complete and permanent cover of the area.
C. Design Parameters
1. Space Allocation
Space allocations shall provide areas for living, dining, kitchen, sleeping, toilet and bat h,
laundry/drying area and storage, the minimum sizes of which shall be in accordance with the
requirements of the National Building Code of the Philippines and its implementing rules and
regulations/referral codes.
1.1 Park s/Playground and/or Other Recreational Areas

a. Parks/Playground (exclusive of easements, access roads, driveways, parking space)
shall be required for:
 Projects with a gross saleable area of 1,000 square meters; or
 Projects with ten (10) or more condominium units.
Except when the condominium is part of a subdivision project or a park/playground
not more than or 800 meters away exists, and in reaching it, the pedestrian will not
be unduly expos ed to hazard.
b. Minimum area for a single park/playground - 50 sq.m. Increments of 3.00 sq.m. for
every additional family dwelling type in excess of 10 units shall be added.
c. Properly landscaped to accommodate bot h active and passive activities.
d. Parks/playground may be accommodated in the yard/s provided such yards are
adequate and usable as park.
e. Other facilities (optional) such as tennis courts, swimming pool, etc. may be
integrated with the park/playground.
1.2 Park ing Space Requirement
a. For Residential Condominium Units
 The minimum parking slot requirement shall be in accordance with the provisions
of the National Building Code of the Philippines.
 Off-site parking may be allowed in addition to the on-site parking provided that
designated parking area is part of the project and provided further that the
required distance conforms to National Building Code of the Philippines - NMT
200 met ers away from condominium project
 Compliance with additional parking spaces as required by local ordinanc es shall
be mandatory.
b. For Commercial Condominium Units
 The minimum parking slot requirement shall be in accordance with the provisions
of the National Building Code of the Philippines.
 Off-site parking may be allowed in addition to the o n-site parking provided that
designated parking area is part of the project or the project is within the
commercial subdivision where common parking area is part of the approved
subdivision plan and provided furt her that parking arrangements are explicitly
indicated in the contract of sale of property to be developed - NMT 200 meters
away from condominium project
1.3 Access Roads

a. Roads shall serve every building, parking spac e, park/ playground and service points
(e.g. garbage collection points).
b. Minimum roads – 8m ROW, 6 m carriageway, 2 m Sidewalk/planting strip
c. Pathwalks shall be provided for pedestrian circulation with a minimum widt h of 1.2
meters.
d. Construction of roads, sidewalk and pathwalks shall be in accordance with the
standards of a residential subdivision.
e. Space for turn around at dead end shall be provided.
f. Direct vehicular access to the property shall be provided by public street or alley.
g. An independent means of access shall be provided to each dwelling, or group of
dwellings in a single plot, without trespassing adjoining properties.
h. Utilities and service facilities must be independent for each dwelling unit.
i. An independent means of access to each living unit shall be provided without
passing through any yard of a living unit or any other yard.
j. Hierarchy of Roads - for horizontal condominium projects, the hierarc hy of roads shall
be the same as the minimum design standard requirements for subdivision projects.
k. Pavement - all roads (major, minor, mot orcourt) for both residential and commercial
condominium projects shall be paved with concrete/asphalt.
1.4 Basic Facilities and Services
1. Service A rea (Laundry/Drying Area)
 Adequate laundry and drying areas shall be provided.
 Where such service areas are held in common, they shall have suitable outdo or
locations, fenced or screened and kept away from living rooms, entrance or front
yards.
2. Utilities
 Water supply, power, sewerage and drainage utilities shall c onform wit h the
requirements of a subdivision.
 For multi-storey buildings
 If the height of the building requires water pressure in excess of that in the main
water line, a water tank shall be provided.
 Tank shall also be required if the peak drawn should reduce t he pressure on the
highest usable floor t o less than 0.06 Mpa - the minimum pressure required for
satisfactory operation of fixtures, particularly those with flush valves.
 Water tank capacity - 20% A verage Daily Demand plus fire reserve
3. Mechanic al Equipment and Service Areas
 Provision of elevators shall conform with t he plans and specifications of the duly
licensed architect/engineer who shall determine the requirement for elevators
including the number of cars, capacity, safety features and standards, elevator
type, speed and location in relation to the over-all design and use of the building;
 The design architect/engineer shall certify under oath that all the components
thereof are in accordance wit h the National B uilding Code of the Philippines, the
accessibility law and national industry standards and other pertinent laws.
 Compliance to the provisions of the Fire Code of the Philippines, shall be mandatory.
4. Refuse Collection/Disposal
 Cent ralized garbage depository area and efficient refuse collection and disposal
services shall be provided whether independently or in conjunction with the cit y
or municipality garbage collection and disposal services.
 It shall conform to the provisions of the sanitation code of the P hilippines and its
implementing rules and regulations/pertinent referral codes.
2. Floor Area Requirements

2.1 Single-Occupanc y Unit
1. Single occupancy units shall have a minimum floor area of 18 square meters,
however, a net floor area of 12 square meters may be allowed provided that these
are intended for students/ employees/ workers and provided further that the
condominium project to which these will be integrat ed is within highly urbanized
areas.
2. Provided with common basic facilities such as laundry/drying area and support
amenities such as visitor's lounge and dining area.
3. Said facilities/support amenities including all other measures that will ensure
compliance with the intended use of the unit shall be ex plicitly indicated in the master
deed/contract to sell.
2.2 Family Dwelling Unit
The minimum floor area of family condominium units shall be 36 s quare meters and 22 s quare
meters for open market and medium cost condominium project respectively.
VARIANCES
These design standards and requirements may be modified or varied by the Board in cases of
1. large scale government and private residential subdivision or condominium projects,

2. housing in areas for priority development or urban land reform zones,
3. resettlement or social housing projects oriented towards low income groups, or
4. housing projects financed by any government financing institution, or
5. in cases where strict observance hereof will cause extreme hardship to the
subdivision or condominium owner/developer:
 The location is unique and different from the adjacent locality, and because
of its uniqueness, the owners can not obtain a reasonable ret urn on the
residential subdivision/condominium projects;
 The hardship is not self-created;

 The proposed variance is due to existing permanent structures
(concret e/steel) and are necessary to permit a reasonable use of the
residential subdivision/condominium;
 The variance will not alter t he essential character of the location where the
residential subdivision for which t he variance is s ought, is located, and will
not substantially or permanently conflict the use of the other residential
subdivision/condominium in the same loc ality; partic ularly those within a 1
kilometer radius thereof;
 The variance will not give rise to unauthorized reclassification of the
approved residential subdivision/condominium plan (i. e. whether partial or full
alteration of the plan), and will not adversely affect the public health, safety or
general welfare, and is in keeping with the general welfare of t he community.
(Per Commission Proper Resolution No. R-53, S. 1982)
Other Real Estate Holdings
Farmlot Subdivision
Laws and Issuances
– PD815 (1975) - Prescribing Penalties For The Unlawful Ejectment, Exclusion, Removal, Or Ouster
Of Tenant-farmers From Their Farmholdings
– EO 648 – Reorganizing the Human Settlements Regulatory Commission
– HLURB Board Resolution No. 750 s. 2003 – Liberalizing the Requirements for the Issuance of
Certificate of Registration and License to Sell for Farmlot Subdivisions
Relevant Terms
Farmlot Subdivision - A planned community intended primarily for intensive agricultural activities and
secondarily for housing
Planned community - Consists of provision of basic utilities, judicious allocation of areas, good layout
based on sound planning principles
Buildable Area - The maximum area allowed for structures attendant to agricultural activities
Agricultural Lands - P arcels of land ranging from 0.20 to 50 or more hectares exclusively or
predominantly us ed for agricultural crop cultivation, livestock production, and agro-forestry without the
intended qualities of the farmlot subdivision
Allowable Uses & Area Requirements

1. Crop farming (tree crops, mixed orchard, diversified crops) – NO LIMITA TION
2. Poultry farm s – limited to backyard scale (maximum 500 birds per lot or 0.19 sq.m. per bird)
3. Swine - limited to backyard scale (maximum 10 sows per lot or 3.00 sq.m. per hog)
4. Aqua-cul ture (tilapia, carp, eel, etc.) – NO LIMITA TION
5. Livelihood – limited to backyard scale
 Milking cow – maximum of 5 cows; 12 sq.m. for 4 – 5 cows
 Cattle fattening – maximum of 5 cows; 8 sq.m. per cow
 Goat raising – maximum of 10 goats; 6 sq.m. per goat (for shelter or quarters only)
6. Vermiculture – depends on production scale; may need initially 20 sq.m.
7. Agro-industrial activities – limited to backyard scale
 Rice mill – maximum of 300 sq.m. & not less than 1,000 met ers away from another
mill
 Food processing/preservation – shall be within the buildable area
8. Cottage industries – limited to backyard scale
 Handicrafts – shall be within the buildable area
 Ceramics – shall be wit hin the buildable area
 Others, or a combination of the above
Minimum Design Standards
 Conform with t he Land Use Plan & Zoning Ordinance of t he locality having jurisdiction over
the project site.
 Variations from these standards may be authorized if deemed reasonable & not detrimental to
the surrounding areas & not self-creat ed
 Dwelling units shall be of appropriate design to minimize surface run-off.
Site Criteria
Zoning & Land Use
–Site shall be located in areas classified as or appropriate for agricultural land use
Accessibility
–Site must be accessible to transportation lines. Roads & railroad facilities should add to site’s
proximity to market centers and industries where farm produce can be readily utilized
Availability of Community Services & Utilities

Roads & wat er sourc es must be found and readily available to serve the needs of the intended/
prospective farm activities. Where available, subdivision development must include provision of power
lines to the farmlots.
Distance from the Urban Core

–Must be away from the center of Metro Manila and/or in the fringes of the urban core of the
metropolis and of the cities and municipalities.
–Should also be accessible from the market cent ers & population centers where the products of the
farmlots can be readily marketed
Physical suitability of the site

Varies with respect to the intended farm activities within the subdivision. Natural features considered
for varied farm activities are slope, climate, and soil type.
Design Considerations
 Minimum Project Size - 1 hectare
 Land Allocation –
o Housing - 40%
o Agricultural Use - 60%
 Lot Sizes – Minimum plot size - 750 sq.m.
 Block Sizes – Block measurement shall have a maximum length of 400 meters
Utilities and Facilities

 Water Supply
o Domestic use – 40 liters/capita/day
o 132 liter for milk-producing cow

o 190 liters per cow
o 8 – 19 liters per 100 birds
 Drainage system – surface or sub-surface
 Waste Disposal System – sewerage system, septic vault, refuse collection system
 Electrical Distribution System – shall be provided
 Front age - minimum of 15 meters w/ an access road
 Buildable Area - should not exceed 25% of total lot area
Required Sites for Community Facilities

Number of Lots or Families and Recommended
Area Requirement for Each Facility Walking
Facilities
24 - 50 - 100- 200- 400- 600 & Distance from
49 99 199 399 599 over Farthest Lot
1 Park &
100 200 400 700 1,200 1,500 1.5
playground
2
Neighborhood/
multi-purpose 50 75 100 150 200 200 1.5
center
3 Number
Service Center 50 100of 150
Lots or200
Families
250 and 300 Recommended
1.5
Area Requirement for Each Facility Walking
Facilities
4 Health Center/ 24 50
- 50 75
- 100-
100 200-
150 400-
200 600200& Distance
1.5 from
Clinic 49 99 199 399 599 over Farthest Lot
5
Community
100 100 200 1.5
Store/ Talipapa
6 Drugstore 50 50 50 50 50 100 0.5
7 Site for
100 1.5
Religious Use
8 Elementary
5,000 0.8
School
9 High School 5,000 1.5
Total Area 300 500 800 1,350 2,000 12,600
Required Government Clearances, Permits & Licenses

– DENR Environmental Compliance Certific ate (ECC)
– Barangay Approval – Barangay Resolution
– Preliminary Approval & Locational Clearance issued by HLURB or LGU
– Final Approval/ Development Permit issued by HLURB or LGU
– Certificate of Registration & License to Sell
INDUSTRIAL S UBDIVISION
Laws & Issuances
EO 648 Reorganizing the Human Settlements Regulatory Commission
HLURB Re solution R-498 (1992) Amending Rules & Regulations on Industrial Subdivisions
Relevant Terms
Industrial Subdivision
A tract of land partitioned into plots for sale or lease t o establishments engaged primarily in industrial
production or services. Degree of development may be limited to:
 Provision of utilities and allocation of areas for industrial buildings, facilities & amenities, or
 Provision of the buildings, facilities & amenities
Industrial Estate (Park)

A form of an industrial subdivision characterized by:
 Development according a comprehensive plan;

 Continuing management of the entire area is left to a single cont rolling body;
 Screening of industries is done prior to development
Industrial Plot or Factory Plot or Plot

An allocated lot within the industrial subdivision int ended for industrial or factory use and where such
industry or factory is located
Plot Buyer/ Lessee

Shall mean any individual, group, or entity who has expressed intention of purchasing/leasing a plot(s)
through the payment of at least an initial fee (down payment ) and first regular payment/ amortization to
the owners in terms and conditions agreed upon by both parties
A plot buyer or lessee shall be taken to mean one regardless of the number of plots he h as
purchased/ leased
Industrial Use
Shall mean a land use/ land activity that is principally engaged in industrial production or services
Design Guidelines
Site Criteria
Located in areas classified as or appropriate for industrial use
Design & Planning Considerations

 Ensure economy, efficiency & flexibility
 Preserve natural features for environment al consideration

Land Allocation
Based on needs of prospective buyers/tenants and the provision of required minimum facilities/utilities
Land Regulations
 May be resorted to for the purpos e of regulating the type & mixture of industrial activities
undertaken including the height and bulk of factory buildings
 Should conform to zoning regulations & pertinent rules & regulations
 Must be approved by HLURB prior to implementation
 Regulations should form part of the contract of lease or deed sale of the industrial plots
Design Standards
 Minimum plot size – 500 sq.m.
 Minimum plot frontage – ½ of the depth of the plot but not less than 10 meters
 All plots shall front on a street.
 Length of blocks – NMT 500 meters
 Setbacks – in accordance with National Building Code
 Roads – all of concrete pavement
 Easements – in accordance with Water Code
o 3 meters eas ement for all urban us es
o 20 meters easement for all agricultural uses
o 40 meters easement for all forest uses
 Buffer strips – at least 10 meters wide along the entire stretch of the subdivision where it abuts
conflicting us es – maybe perimeter road, parking lot, or preferably planting strip
 Hierarchy of Roads
o Major - 20m ROW, 2m SW each side, 1m PS each side
o Secondary - 17m ROW, 1.5m SW each side, 1m PS each side
o Service - 13m ROW, 1.5m SW each side, 1m PS each side
o Pathway – 4m ROW
 No dead ends
 Pathways encouraged
o Minimum 4 met ers wide; connect to road network, factory buildings & facilities
 Parking, Loading & Unloading Areas
o On-street parking discouraged
o Allocate land for off-street loafing/unloading; locate to minimize traffic obstruction
 Entrance & exit points
o Strategic location for security & emergency considerations
 Other transport facilities
o Construction of wharves and other facilities to conform with standards & guidelines of
pertinent agencies
 Utilities
o Water supply system – whenever possible, connect to an approved public or
community water supply system provided it is not prejudicial to needs of loc ality; if
inadequate – develop additional source or install approved c entralized wat er s upply
system
 Owner shall provide water for industrial (minimum 85 cu.m. per day per hectare) & domestic
consumption (minimum 75 LPCP D)
 Provide waste disposal system
o Industrial waste, sewage disposal, solid waste
 Provide storm drainage system
 Put up power supply and communication system
 Provide fire escape facilities
 Facilities & Amenities
o Projects with a minimum of 20 plots - alloc ate 1% of gross area for administration
o Allocate space for facilities necessary for the well-being of workers & employees
Requirements for Implementation

 Barangay Approval – Barangay Resolution
 Preliminary Approval of Development Plan & Locational Clearance – HLURB or LGU
 Final A pproval of Development Plan & Development Permit (valid for 2 years) – HLURB or
LGU
 Environmental Compliance Certificate - DENR
 Certificate of Registration & License to Sell/Lease - HLURB
Miscellaneous Provisions
 Advertisements
o Cleared with HLURB
o Should contain the approved Licens e to Sell/Lease
 Request for Extension – 1 year to complete project upon approval
 Non-forfeiture of installment payments
 Issuance of title – upon full payment of the plot
 Registration of conveyance – within 180 days
 Mortgage – cleared with HLURB
 Realty tax – owner/ developer to pay; buyer who has taken possession or occupied the plot is
liable to owner/ developer for such tax assessment effective the year following such
possession or occupancy
 Broker a s witness to sale

M EMORIAL P ARK
Definition of Memorial Park
A privately-owned cemetery with well kept landscaped lawns and wide roadways and footpaths
separating the areas assigned for ground interments, tombs, mausoleums and columbaria; with or
without a mortuary chapel; and provided with a systematic supervision and maintenance and where
park-like atmosphere is its outstanding quality.
Steps to Secure License to Lease/Sell from HLURB

1. Prepare P roject Feasibility Study
2. Secure Zoning Certification issued by HLURB or city/municipality concerned.
3. Secure Initial Clearance by the Department of Health by P.D. 856 (Sanit ation Code)
4. Secure E nvironment al Compliance Certificate (ECC) or Certificate of Non-Coverage (CNC)
duly issued by the Department of Environmental and Natural Res ources (DENR).
≥ 5 hectares – requires ECC
 5 hectares – requires CNC
5. Approval of P reliminary Development Plan from HLURB - for projects located in cities or
municipalities wit h or without a Land Use Plan and/or Zoning Ordinance
6. Secure Clearances/Permits from National W ater Res ources HLURB (NWRB)
7. Secure Permit from the Department of Public W orks and Highways (DPWH) when necessary
e.g. when opening an access to a controlled traffic artery.
8. Secure Approval of Final Memorial Park Plan from HLURB
9. Secure Certificate of Registration from HLURB
10. Secure License to Sell/Lease from HLURB
11. Secure permits/clearances from LGU concerned
Approval of the Preliminary Development Plan

 For projects located in cities or municipalities with or without a Land Use Plan and/or Zoning
Ordinanc e
 Valid only for a period of 180 days from date of approval.
 A revalidation can be availed of only once after said period.
Documentary Requirements for Approval of Preliminary Development Plan

1. Site Development Plan/Scheme duly signed and sealed by a licensed environment al planner
a. accessible to Persons With Disabilities (PWDs) in accordance with BP 344 otherwise known
as the Accessibility Law and the Magna Carta for disabled persons (RA 7277)
2. Documents duly signed and sealed by a licensed geodetic engineer:
a. Vicinity map/location map at a scale of 1:10,000 with a radius of 500 meters from the project
site indicating existing utilities. and community facilities
b. Topographic Plan to include existing conditions
3. Zoning Certification from HLURB or LGU concerned
4. Certified true copy of Environmental Compliance Certificate (E CC) or Certificate of Non-Coverage
(CNC) duly issued by DE NR
5. Certified true copy of Title and Survey Plan.
Approval of Final Memorial Park/Cemetery Plan

1. Engineering plans duly signed and sealed by a licensedcivil engineer based on applicable
Engineering Code and Design Criteria
2. Final Memorial Park/Cemetery Plan consisting of the site development plan duly signed and
sealed by a licensed environmental planner
3. Storm drainage duly signed and sealed by a licensed sanitary engineer of civil engineer.
4. Cent ralized or combined storm and sewer system duly signed and sealed by a licensed sanitary
engineer.
5. Site grading plan duly signed and sealed by a licensed civil engineer.
6. Electrical plan and specifications duly signed and sealed by a licensed professional electrical
engineer and duly approved by the city/municipal electrical engineer.
7. Landscaping plan indicating plant/tree species and other natural/man-made landscaping features
e.g. lagoon, garden, benches, etc. duly signed and sealed by a licensed landscape architect.
8. Summary of Project Study indicating market, source/s of fund, statement of income, cash flow and
work program.
9. Certified True Copy of Title or other evidence of ownership or intent to sell and aut hority to
develop signed by the owner, Tax Declaration and current real estate tax receipt.
10. Clearances/Permits/Certifications from other agencies applicable to the Project:
11. Clearances/Permits from National Water Res ourc es Board (NWRB )
a. Clearance stating that the memorial park/cemetery is not located on ground where the water
table is not higher than 4.50 meters below the ground surface.
b. Water permit whenever a well within the project site shall be dug.
c. Permit to operate the well.
12. Permit from the Department of Public Works and Highways (DPWH) when necessary e.g. when
opening an access to a controlled traffic artery.
13. Initial clearances from the Department of Health.
14. Certified True Copy of E CC or CNC duly issued by the DE NR.
15. Joint affidavit of owner/ developer and licensed environmental planner that the memorial
park/cemetery plan conforms to the standards and requirements of these rules and that
development thereof shall be made in accordance wit h the program submitted to the HLURB or
city/municipality concerned.
16. List of names of duly licensed professional who signed the plans and other similar documents in
connection with application filed with HLURB or city/municipality
Development Permit Issued

 If the application for the project is physically feasible
 Plan complies with the zoning ordinance of the city or municipality where it is situated
 Complies with the rules per HLURB Resolution

 Issued by the HLURB or city/ municipality concerned upon payment of the prescribed
processing fee and under such conditions as may be imposed by the HLURB or
city/municipality concerned.
Validity of Final Approval/Development Permit

 Valid for a period of 2 years from date of issue
 If physical development such as clearing and grubbing, road excavation, filling and
compaction, etc. is not commenced within s aid period, the grantee of the permit may apply for
its revalidation within the next succeeding year.
 If development permit expires, no development shall be allowed unless a new application for
approval is filed.
Certificate of Registration from HLURB

 Submission of Survey Returns - Submit an authenticated copy of the verified survey ret urns
of mot her title, sections, and blocks including number of tots per block in each section together
with the technical descriptions of road lots, open spaces, facilities and blocks as surveyed by
the owner's/ developer's licensed geodetic engineer.
 The technical description shall form part of the certificate of lease/deed of s ale issued to each
lessee/buyer.
Application for Registration

When the proponent has at least accomplished 20% of the total development and is interested in the
perpetual lease/sale of plots in a memorial park/cemet ery project he shall register the project with the
HLURB
Documentary Requirements
1. Sworn registration statement
2. Copy of the TCT in the name of the applicant if none was submitted in the application for plan
approval;
3. Articles of Incorporation or Articles of Part ners hip or Association
4. Copy of latest annual corporate report to the S ecurities and Exchange Commission, i ncluding a
copy of the latest financial statements certified by a certified public account ant
5. Affidavit of the owner that the property is free from liens and enc umbrances, except legal
easement and restrictions.
a. In case the project or portion thereof is mo rtgaged, to release the mortgage on any plot as
soon as the full purchase/lease pric e for the same is paid by the buyer/lessee;
6. A copy of contract form to be used in the lease/sale of plots
7. A copy of the cont ract of management or development, if the management and/or development
will be undertaken by a pers on other than the owner, and
8. A copy of any circular, prospectus, brochure, advertisement, letter of communication to be used
for the public offering of the memorial park/cemetery plots.
Publication of Filing of Registration Statement

 Upon finding that the project may be registered in accordance wit h the provision of t hese
Rules, the HLURB shall cause to be published at the expense of the applicant a notice of the
filing of the registration statement in 2 newspapers of general circulation; one published in
English and anot her in Pilipino, once a week for 2 cons ecutive weeks, reciting that a
registration statement for the lease/sale of the plots has been filed with the HLURB and that
the aforesaid registration statement as well as papers attached thereto, are open to inspection
during business hours by interested parties.
 After 2 weeks from the completion of the publication and upon submission of t he affidavit of
publications, the HLURB shall in the absence of any impediment, issue a certificate of
registration upon payment of the prescribed fees.
License to Lease/Sell
 No owner or dealer shall lease/sell any disposable plot in the registered project without a
license to lease/sell issued by the HLURB.
 Upon proper application t herefore, submission of the required work program, performance
bond and payment of the prescribed license fee by the owner or dealer, the HLURB shall
issue to him a license t o lease/sell the plots in the project or portion thereof covered by the
performance bond, his business is financially stable, and the proposed lease/sell of the plots
to the public is not fraudulent.
Performance Bond
The performanc e bond required may be in any of the following forms:
1. A surety bond amounting t o 20% of the cost of the outstanding remaining or t he unfinished
portion of the approved plan
2. Real Estate Mortgage to be execut ed by the applicant as mortgagor in favor of the Republic of
the Philippines as mortgagee,
3. A cash bond equivalent to 50% of the development cost
Design Standards and Guidelines

Memorials parks shall conform with
1. Land use plan or zoning ordinance of the locality having jurisdiction over the project site
2. Pertinent provisions of the
a. Sanitation Code
b. Water Code,
c. National Building Code of t he Philippines and its referral codes, like the Accessibility Law,
Plumbing Code, Electrical Code, etc. and
d. other applicable laws and rules affecting related services and
3. Design standards set by HLURB
Site Criteria
 Memorial parks shall be loc ated on the perip hery of the town center or in areas
sparsely inhabited and where little hazard to human life or health could result.
 Undue proliferation of memorial parks/ cemeteries in any municipality/city shall not be allowed.
 The number of cemeteries/ memorial parks to be allowed within eac h municipality/city shall be
based on the needs or death rat e in the municipality and future catchment areas as well.

1. Location
In municipalities/cities with approved CLUP or zoning ordinance
 Memorial parks shall be located in areas zoned for cemet ery purpos es
 If no zone stipulated, the memorial park/cemetery shall only be allowed in
a. Areas zoned as open space, provided that
 Such use is not specifically restricted in the district or zone
 Compatible with the proposed use in the zone
 The proposed project site is not within Strategic Agriculture and Fisheries
Development Zones (SAFDZ) as certified by the DA.
b. Areas zoned as agricultural , provided that the site is:
 Not tenanted and not covered by operation land trans fer and not locat ed in areas
covered by the CARP as certified by the DAR
 Not prime agricultural land as certified by the DA ); and
 Not irrigated as certified by the National Irrigation Administration (NIA).
In cities/municipalities without an approved CLUP or zoning ordinance, the memorial
park/cemetery shall be allowed in:
 An area adjacent to an existing cemetery/ memorial park: Provided, that the restrictions for
areas zoned as open space & agric ultural (above) are met.
 An area where the dominant land use within one hundred (100) meters from the periphery of
the proposed memorial park/ cemetery is neither residential, commercial, industrial or
institutional: Provided, however, that the restrictions for agricultural lands are met.
 An area deemed by the HLURB as appr opriate and in accordance with the principles of
Planned Unit Development (PUD).
2. Physical Suitability
 The memorial park/cemet ery shall not be allowed in environmentally critical areas as defined
in Proclamation No. 2146.
 It must be located on ground where the water table is not higher than four and 4.50 meters
below the ground surface as certified by the National Water Resources Board (NWRB).
 Acce ssi bility - The site must be served by a road with a minimum width or right -of-way of not
less than 8.00 meters.
 The right-of-way of major roads shall be increased as project size increases.
 All relevant provisions of BP344 (Accessibility Law) shall be observed.
Design and Planning Considerations

 Memorial Parks must achieve flexibility in design and orderly lay -out to respond to t he various
spatial requirements of burial and at the same time for economic land use and environmental
control.
 Land shall be judiciously allocated for the various requirements and amenities.
 Suitable areas shall be allocated for the pl anting of trees, shrubs, plants and for other
functional and decorative elements such as monuments, sculptures, fountains and benches.
Land Allocation
 No fix ed ratio for saleable area
o Owner/developer shall reserve the required areas for roads, pathways, parking and
other facilities and amenities
o For memorial parks, at least 50 % of the saleable area shall be utilized for
underground interment in order to retain park-like character of the project.
Burial Plot Sizes

Ground Interment- Minimum size shall be 1.00 meter by 2.50 meters inside dimensions
Tomb (for cemeteries only) - Minimum burial plot size shall be 1.6 meters by 3.00 meters inside
dimensions.
Mausoleum - Minimum plot size of 4.00 meters by 5.00 meters.
Provisions for ossuary and cinerarium shall me et the minimum dimensions for cineraria - which is 300
mm x 300 mm x 600 mm (National Building Code)


Review Questions
1. A buyer of a subdivision lot on installment aft er sufficient notice to the developer discontinued paying
amortization becaus e the developer failed to develop the subdivision as c ertified by the HLURB in
such a situation and under P.D. 957, the buyer is entitled to a refund which would be:
a. Total payment made less penalty charges.

b. Total payments made less penalty and int erest charges.
c. Total payments made less penalty charges plus interest on total payment.
d. Total payments including penalty charges
e. None of the above.
2. Unless extended for justifiable cause, the period of completion of development of a subdivision
project, counted from issuance of license to sell, is:
a. Six months d. Eighteen months

b. Twelve months e. Twenty four months
c. None of the above
3. Registration of a mortgage covering a subdivision project or completion of development of a

subdivision project is at the:
a. Local Government Unit

b. Housing and Urban Development Coordinating Council
c. Home Ins urance Guarantee Corporation
d. Housing and Land Use Regulatory Board
e. National Housing Authority
4. In the absence of any provision in the master deed of a condominium project, the int erest of the unit
owners in the common areas shall be:
a. Proportionate d. Decided by the condominium corporation

b. Based on Value e. None of the above
c. Equal
5. Urban Development and Housing Act:

a. R.A. 7279 c. R.A. 9279 e. None of the above
b. R.A. 7927 d. R.A. 7972
6. Condominium Act:
a. R.A. 4727 c. R.A. 4276 e. None of the above

b. R.A. 2774 d. R.A. 4726
7. Document to be checked before buying a subdivision lot:
a. Development permit d. Map

b. License to sell e. None of the above
c. Bureau of Land approval

8. Sometimes referred to as vertical subdivision:
a. Row Houses d. Mansion

b. Town Houses e. None of the above
c. Condominium
9. Subdivision and Condominium Buyers Protective Decree:
a. P.D. 1216 d. P.D. 957

b. B.P. 220 e. None of the above
c. P.D. 1981
10. Which of the following cannot be issued condominium certificates of titles?
a. One-level row houses d. Two- level row hous es

b. Industrial Warehouses e. None of the above
c. Subdivision Lots
11. Title to condominium units is vested in:
a. Corporation owning the building d. Association of the Building

b. Owner of condominium unit e. All of the above.
c. Lot owner of the condominium project
12. The required number of vot es of registered owners to authorize a condominium corporation to sell or
otherwise dispose of the common areas in a condominium project is:
a. Two- thirds d. Unanimous

b. Three-fourths e. None of the above
c. Simple majority
13. As provided by R.A. 7279, a developer of a subdivision project is required to develop an equivalent
20 % of the project for:
a. Economic housing c. Open Space

b. Commercial area e. none of the above
c. Socialized housing
14. Jurisdiction for adjudication of buyers’ complaints against subdivision developers is with the:
a. Bureau of Trade Regulation and Consumer Protection
c. National Housing Authority
d. Housing and Land Use Regulatory Board
e. Regular courts
15. The minimum carriage way of major roads of socialized housing project under t he implementing rules
and regulations of BP 220 and P D 957 is:
a. 5 meters d. 6 meters
b. 7 meters e. 8 meters
c. 10 meters
16. The performanc e bond for a subdivision project may be in the form of a surety bond equivalent to:
a. 10% of development cost

b. 20% of development cost
c. 30% of development cost
d. 40% of development cost
e. None of the above
17. The amendment to the Master Deed of a condominium project decided by majority of registered
owners must be approved by the HLURB and:
a. City or municipal mayor d. City or municipal council

b. City or municipal assessor e. City or municipal building official
c. City or municipal engineer
18. The areas reserved for parks, playgrounds and recreational areas of a subdivision project are:
a. Exclusively owned by the owner-developer

b. Co-owned by the developer and lot buy er
c. Non-alienable public lands
d. Saleable lots
e. None of the above
19. The term of a condominium corporation is:
a. Fifty years
b. Twenty-five years
c. Ten years
d. Co-t erminus with duration of condominium project
e. Subject to agreement bet ween the condominium corporation and the unit owners

20. The area reserved for roads, alleys and open spaces in a subdivision project with an area of one
hectare or more is:
a. 20% of gross area d. 25% of gross area

b. 30% of gross area e. 35% of gross area
21. For a space to be considered a condominium unit, it must:
a. be encompassed by interior surface of walls, floors and ceilings

b. be managed by a condominium corporation
c. be susceptible of independent use and owners hip
d. be unencumbered by any restriction
e. at least five storeys high
22. In mixed us e condominium project, the master deed may be amended by simple majority of unit
owners. Majority is based on:
a. Number of condominium units d. Floor area of ownership

b. Total area of condominium units e. Any of the above
23. Amendment to the master deed of a condominium project approved by majority of registered owners
also need to be approved by the city engineer and:
a. Local Government
c. Housing and Land Use Regulatory Board
d. Land Registration Authority
e. National Housing Authority
Answer K ey
1. b..Tot al payments made less penalty and interest charges.

2. b. Twelve mont hs
3. b. Housing and Land Use Regulatory Board
4. c. Equal
5. a. RA 7279
6. d. RA 4726
7. b. License to sell
8. c. Condominium
9. d. P.D. 957
10. c. Subdivision lots
11. b. Owner of condominium unit
12. c. Simple majority
13. c. Socialized housing
14. e. Regular courts
15. d. 6 meters
16. b. 20% of development cost
17. c. City or municipal engineer
18. c. Non-alienable public lands
19. d. Co-terminus with duration of condominium project
20. b. 30% of gross area
21. c. be susceptible of independent use and ownership
22. d. Floor area of ownership
23. d. Housing and Land Use Regulatory Board

PRACTICE
BOARD EXAM
QUESTIONS
PRACTICE QUESTIONS - SET A
1. Which is not a key feature of the professional planning process?
(A) Proactive (B) problem-solving (C) algorithmic (D) futuristic (E) people -driven
2. This pertains to the proc ess wherein large numbers of people, driven by demographic factors, live
together in important locations -- a process that is always accompanied by economic agglomeration,
spatial alteration, and socio-cultural change.
(A) Industrialization (B) Urbanization (C) Social Transformation (D) Modernization
3. In causal order, which should come first in this series or chain of intertwined, multi-dimensional
problems?.
(A) Climate Change (D) Land Use Changes

(B) Unmanaged Population Growt h (E) Pollution and Environmental Degradation
(C) Poverty (F) Carbon Footprint
4. Urban planning is “conc erned with providing the right place at the right site at the right time” for the
right people.
(A) John Ratcliffe (B) Lewis Keeble (C) Brian McLoughlin (D) George Chadwick
(E) Alan Wilson
5. This refers to the wise and prudent use of any resource that is held in trust.
(A) technocracy (B) shepherding (C) prot ectionism (D) championing (E) stewardship
6. According to theorists of ‘Social Development‘ and ‘Sustainable Development,’ what is the

relationship between the concepts of ‘Growth’ and ‘Development’?
(A) these two realities are essentially similar, hence, interchangeable in use.
(B) growth refers to the entire macro -economy while development refers to people and society
(C) growth is a pre-c ondition to development but not enough in itself; it is necessary but not sufficient
condition.
(D) growth is merely quantitative while development is thoroughly qualit ative
(E) growth is indicat ed by income and infrastructure, while development is indicated by tranquility, peace
and order
P a g e |b REVIEWER FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING

7. This started as a US federal program in 1949 which aimed to rehabilitate the outworn or decaying
sections of any town by extending fund assistance to LGUs to undertake improvem ents in
streetscapes, parks, greenways, housing, community centers, etc based on anticipation that future
tax revenues from real estate will pay for pres ent costs.
(A) land re-adjustment (B) urban restructuring

(C) infill and densific ation (D) urban renewal
8. This school of thought holds that settlements form in a balanced manner; they tend to be spread
evenly and symmetrically in isotropic space, displaying both hierarchy and equilibrium arising from
the interdependence bet ween big and small settlements and from the complementation bet ween their
respective scope of functions.
(A) Galaxy of Settlements Theory (B) Central Place Theory (C) Geographic Det erminism
(D) Dependency Theory
9. All of the following are practical applications of Central Place Theory in the Philippines, except one.
(A) location of health centers (B) location of trial courts (C) location of beach resorts (D) location
of police stations
10. RA 7916 reiterates Sec. 12, Art XII of Philippine Constitution, "The State shall promote the
preferential use of Filipino labor, domestic materials and locally produced goods and adopt measures
that help mak e them competitive." What technical planning concept pertains most aptly to this?
(A) inflow - out flow - backflow (C) economic nationalism or Filipinism

(B) trickle up and trickle down (D) forward linkages and backward linkages in production
11. In HLURB Guidelines, which of the following does not fall under the ‘social sector’?
(A) Education (B) Tourism (C) Health (D) Police Protective Services
(E) Sports and Recreation
12. In HLURB Guidelines, which of the following does not fall under the ‘economic sector’?
(A) Housing (B) Mining (C) ICT and Business Process Outsourcing (D) Mariculture
(E) Small Scale Industries
13. The “SMA RT test” by George Doran means that both ‘task objectives’ and ‘proc ess objectives’ have
to be specific, measurable, attainable, realistic, and ____
(A) tenable (B) truthful (C) time-bound (D) testable (E) treat able
14. These areas are so called because they pose serious dangers to human settlements due to their high
susceptibility to, among others, landslides, subsidence, sinkholes, erosion once their topsoil is
exposed.
(A) ‘geohazards’ (B) ‘brownfields’ (C) ‘environmentally critical’ (D) ‘nat urally forbidden’
15. Presidential Decree 2146 defines ‘amenity areas’ as those with high aesthetic values such as the
following, except one.
(A)outstanding landscapes, seascapes, and viewscapes

(B) planetarium, space observatory, and science cent rum
(C) heritage sites and historic places
(D) municipal plazas and public parks
16. ‘Ekistics’ or the ‘science of human settlements’ by Dr Konstantinos Doxiadis was built upon the
concept of “basic needs,” which were later categorized by Johann Galtung into “material survival &
security needs,” “social or enabling needs,” and non-material “human needs.” Which grouping of
needs was elaborated on by Abraham Maslow?
(A) food, water, clothing, shelter, sanitation, health care, energy/fuel, employment, peac e and order,
(B) self-expression, sex, procreation, recreation, education, communication, and transportation
(C) physiological needs, physical safety, love and belongingness, esteem, self-actualization/self-
realization
(D) freedom, security, identity, well-being, ecological balance
17. A ‘problem tree’ is
(A) a kind of tree that grows in the wrong place

(B) a method of environmental impact assessment
(C) a tool to understand cause and effect relations among problems
(D) used to trace ancient roots of intractable development problems
18. In using descriptive statistics to study population and society, the thr ee measures of central tendency
are:
(A) midpoint, minimum, and maximum (C) occurrence, convergence, and divergence
(B) range, frequency, and threshold (D) mean, median, mode
19. How many hectares are there in one square kilometer?

(A) 10 (B) 100 (C) 1,000 (D) 10,000
20. ‘Labor Force’ is more accurately defined as comprising all persons
(A) age 18 to 65 years currently employed, underemployed, or active in the informal sector or
underground economy
(B) age 16 to 64 years regardless of gender, ec onomic status, qualification, physical fitness, mental
health condition
(C) age 15 to 64 years not in school nor under special care and actively seeking productive work or
employment
(D) age 14 years and above wit h demonstrated literacy, numeracy, writing, and analytical skills
P a g e |d REVIEWER FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING

21. The law that provides for a comprehensive and continuing urban development and housing program
and establishes the mechanisms for the implementation of socialized housing in the Philippines
(A) RA 7279 (B) RA 7160 (C) RA 1010 (D) RA 6969
22. What color is used to represent residential areas in zoning map?
(A) Yellow (B) Brown (C) Aqua Marine (D) Red
23. In RA 9397’s amendment to expand socializ ed housing options of national/local government under
RA 7279 UDHA, which common mode/program is being remedied for its uneven effectiveness in
addressing homelessness?
(A) transfer of homelot ownership in fee simple

(B) public rental housing
(C) usufruct or lease with option to purchas e
(D) time-share arrangements and communal shelt er
24. What is minimum gross lot area of a row-house unit of socialized housing under Batas Pambansa
220?
(A) 32 sqm (B) 36 sqm (C) 18 sqm (D) 22 sqm
25. According to PD 1096 National Building Code of 1977 Sec 104, a residential dwelling unit or “Group
A” building shall have one side adjoin or have direct access to a public space, yard, street, or alley;
shall not occupy more than 90% of a corner lot or 80% of an inside lot; and be built in such a way that
its exterior wall is at least ____ from the property line
(A) 2.0 m (B) 4.0 m (C) 6.0 m (D) 8.0 m
26. According to P D 1096 National B uilding Code o f 1977 Sec 808, room ventilation in a dwelling unit
without air conditioning or mechanical ventilation is based on the ratio that area of window opening
should be at least ______ of floorspace.
(A) one-fifth (B) one-sixth (C) one-eighth (D) one-tenth
27. What should be the minimum distance between a drinking water-well or spring from the drainfield of a
septic tank?
(A) 15 m (B) 25 m (C) 35 m (D) 45 m (E) 55 m
28. By Philippine standards, how far should a stript ease joint, beerhouse, casa, or place of ill-repute be
allowed to locate in relation to a school?
(A) 50 meters away or more (B) 100 meters away or more

(C) at least 200 met ers away (D) at least 500 meters away
SET A ANSW ER KEY:
1 C algorithmic
2 B urbanization
3 B unmanaged population growth
4 A John Ratcliffe
5 E stewardship
6 A these two realities are essentially similar, hence, interchangeable in use
7 D urban renewal
8 B central place theory
9 C location of beach res orts
10 C economic nationalism or Filipinism
11 B tourism
12 A housing
13 C time-bound
14 C environmentally critical
15 B planetarium, space observatory, and science centrum
16 C physiological needs, physical safety, love and belongingness, esteem, self-
actualization/self-realization
17 C a tool to understand cause and effect relations among problems
18 D mean, median, mode
19 B 100
20 C age 15 to 64 years not in school nor under special care and actively seeking productive
work or employment
21 A RA 7279
22 A Yellow
23 A transfer of homelot ownership in fee simple
24 A 32 sqm
25 A 2.0m
26 D one-tenth
27 B 25 m
28 D at least 500 meters away
P a g e |f REVIEWER FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING

PRACTICE QUESTIONS – SET B
Direction: Please encircle the correct answer
1. The enforcement of PD 1308 as well the monitoring and inspection of educational institution
offering courses in environment al planning is the responsibility of the
a. Commission on Higher Education

b. Philippine Institution of E nvironmental Planners
c. Board of Environmental Planners
d. School of Urban and Regional Planning
2. A consulting firm, partnership, company, corporation or association may engage in the practice of
environmental planning of the Philippines, provide d that
a. At least 75% of the entire membership of the Board of the entity shall be registered
environmental planners
b. At least 70% of the total capitalization of the entity is owned by registered environmental
planners
c. At least 70% of the entire membershi p of the Board is composed of Enp’s and 75% of the
capitalization is owned by them
d. At least 75% of the entire membership and 75% of the capitalization is owned by the
registered environmental planners
3. The practice of environmental planning within the me aning of PD 1308 does not involve are the
following:
a. Site and land use planning

b. City/town planning
c. Family planning]
d. None of the above
4. Demography denotes the study of human population through statistical methods. This involves
primarily the measurement of the size and inc reas e or decrease of the numbers of people. The
constituents of change in these numbers are:
a. Births and deaths

b. Births, deaths and migration
c. Birth, adoption, marriage, divorce legal separation and annulment
d. Birth, citizenship, duration of marriage and ethnic origin
5. Under the concept of urbanization as defined in the Philippine Census of population in 1990
central districts of municipalities and areas have population density of at least.
a. 100 persons per square kilometer

b. 250 persons per square kilometer
c. 500 persons per square kilometer
d. 1000 persons per square kilometer
6. Cert ain Environmental factors affect population distribution at a given point in time. They are
a. Climate
b. Location of water, soil, energy and mineral resources
c. Trans port relationships
d. All of the above
7. Sex ratio is defined as:
a. The number of females divide by the number of males, times 100

b. The number of males divided by the number of females, times 100
c. The number of males divided by the number of females, times 10
d. The number of females divided by the number of males, times 10
8. Population projections are essentially detailed way of seeing the effect a few given assumptions
about future population trend will have on the size and structure of the population. They are very
reliable predictions or forec ast.
True or False
9. Thomas Robert Malthus was the one who first concluded that
a. The means of subsistence grew only at an arit hmetic rate

b. The means of subsistence and population grew at an arithmetic rate
c. Means of subsistence and population grew at a geometric rate
d. The means of subsistence grew only at an arit hmetic rate whereas the population tended to
grow at a geomet ric rate.
10. When the age and sex compositions of most populations are plotted graphically, the result is a
“population pyramid”, the broad base represents the youngest ages, and the sides gradually
slope toward a point, representing the decrease brought about by deaths in each successive age
group. The pyramid represents
a. a static picture because it freezes the continuous action of mortality, fertility and migration at
a particular moment in time
b. a uniform increase in all age brackets over a period of time
c. migration and fertility trends
d. all of the above
11. in many metropolitan centers in the developing world the largest component of urban population
growth is
a. births
b. in-migration
c. increase in territorial jurisdiction
d. all of the above
12. Metro Manila is considered a primate city because
a. It is the largest urban center in the country
b. It contains the country’s primary central business district
c. It has a very large population compared to all other urban centers of the country
d. It is a metropolitan center
13. Ancestral domains refer to areas that
a. Belong to ICC’s compromising land, inlands waters, coastal areas and natural resources
herein
b. Are within protected areas which have actually been occupied by communities for 5 years
before the designation of the same as protected areas in accordance with the NIPAS Act
c. Are set aside to allow the way of life of societies living in harmony with the en vironment to
adapt to modern technology at their pac e
d. Are extensive and relatively isolated and uninhabited area normally with difficult access
P a g e |h REVIEWER FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING

14. The law that provides for the establishment and management of National Integrated Protected
Areas System is
a. RA 8371
b. RA 7586
c. RA 7279
15. RA 8435 or the Agriculture and Fishery Modernization Act (AFMA) of 1997 strive to provide full
and adequat e support to the sustainable development of a highly modernized agriculture and
fishery industry in the Philippines. Under AFMA, one of the following has been de – prioritized
a. Identification and establishment of model farms

b. On – farm production enhancement technology
c. Small-scale irrigation system
d. Research, development and training facilities
16. Along wit h the Network of Protected Area for Agriculture and Agro-Industrial Development
(NTAAA D), it provides the physical basis for the proper planning of sustainable agriculture and
fishery development and in the identification of suitable crops, livestock and fishes t hat can be
economic ally grown and commercially developed for local and int ernational markets without
creating irreversible environmental and human health problems.
a. The Watershed Areas

b. Comprehensive Land Use Plan
c. Integrated Area Development
d. Strategic Agriculture and Fishery Development Zone
17. The factors for analyzing traditional location theory are
a. The cost of marketing and advertising

b. Labor wages
c. The cost of transporting raw materials to the factory and finished goods to the mark et
d. All of the above
18. If the Gini Coefficient of an industry’s distribution in a region is close to zero, it suggest that
a. The distribution of the industry in the region is very concentrated

b. The distribution of the industry in the region is dispersed
c. The distribution of the industry in the region does not have deviate much from the distribution
of other industries
d. The region has a larger share of the industry relative to other regions
19. A hierarchy of settlement is usually characterized by the presenc e of
a. A few large cities, some medium-sized cities, and many small settlements
b. Only medium-sized and small settlements
c. Equally-sized large cities in every region
d. Only one large city and many small settlements
20. Land use changes in large and developed cities is largely a function of
a. Government land us e and zoning policies

b. Existing and expected land values
c. Demand for housing
d. Foreign investments
21. The best measure of the project’s economic worthiness and its adaption as a basis for project
acceptability is
a. Net present value

b. Discounted rate
c. EIRR
d. FIRR
22. The standard distance of a commercial activity from an education center should be
a. 15 minut es by public transport

b. 15 minut es by private trans port
c. 30 minut es minimum travel time by public transport
d. 60 minut es travel time by public transport
23. A tool of analysis developed as an effective way of choosing between alt ernative planning options
by ensuring the optimum allocation of available resources and maximum welfare to the
community is
a. Cost-benefit analysis
b. Linear programming
c. Shift-share analysis
d. Sensitivity analysis
24. Land use conversion is limited by reclassification ceilings under various legal issuances eg. Local
Government Code Under the AFMA only 5% of the SAFDC areas may be corrected to other uses
while the LGC limits it to
st
a. 15% of total arable lands in chartered cities and 1 class municipalities
b. 10% of total arable land in any town
c. 5% of total arable land in any city
d. All of the above
25. The first industrial estate in the country, which became operational in 1972, was the
a. Bataan IE
b. Dasmariñas IE
c. Mactan IE
d. Sapang Palay IE
26. This is the first place where the first export processing zone in the world was established
a. Puerto Rico
b. India
c. Taiwan
d. Korea
27. This strategy aims to promote greater complementarity between agriculture and industry and
between urban and rural sectors
a. Countryside agro-industrial development

b. National council for integrated area development
c. Nationwide agro-industrial area devepolment
P a g e |j REVIEWER FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING

28. This strategy refers to a situation where an industry through the flow of goods and income
stimulates the development and growth of the industries, that are technically related to it, and
determines the prosperity of the tertiary sector or stimulates an increase of the regional inc ome
a. Growth pole
b. Industrial polariz ation
c. Industrial decentralization
d. Industrial location
29. Ebenezer Howard, the most influential among the Great Thinkers in modern urban and regional
planning, wrote this amours book, first published in 1898.
a. Garden Cities
b. Garden Cities of Tomorrow
c. Tomorrow’s Cities
d. Tomorrow
30. In the United States a parallel idea on influencing urbanization focused on the neighborhood unit.
This American planner espoused the neighboring unit, not only as a planning unit, but as a
deliberat e piece of social engineering.
a. Desmond Heap
b. Stuard Chopin
c. Clarence Stein
d. Clarence Perry
31. Patrick Geddes, a Scot biologist who is acknowledge as the father of regional planning set forth
his ideas in his masterpiece entitled.
a. Cities and Region

b. Cities in E volution
c. Cities in E volutionary Change
d. Revolution in Citi es
32. Kevin Ly nch stresses
a. A conceptual system focusing on urban form

b. A communications theory approach to urban growt h
c. Accessibility concepts and urban structure
d. Urban spatial structure in the framework of equilibrium theory (an ec onomic model of spatial
structure)
33. Albert Z Guttenberg speculates
a. A concept system focusing on urban form

structure)
34. Based on the principle of devolution of powers to local government units, the National
Government transfers these Funds to LGU’s for their administrative, public order and safety
operations.
a. Internal Revenue Allotments

b. Budgetary Allocations
c. Local Development Allotments
d. LGU Budgetary Allotments
35. Morbidity refers to.
a. Deat hs per 1000 population

b. Deat hs per 1000 population
c. Deat hs due to diseases
d. Incidence of disease
36. Because NS O age groupings do not coincide with school-going age population, intermediate,
secondary and tertiary, this method is used to disaggregate school age population within a
bracket into a single year estimate:
a. Sprague multiplier
b. Sprengler multiplier
c. Extrapolation coefficient
d. Interpolation coefficient
37. Planning standards for school facilities include minimum standards for spac e measured in terms
of square meters per pupil (p.p) for classrooms in elementary level, the minimum standard is.
a. 1.20 sqm per p.p

b. 1.40 sqm per p.p
c. 1.50 sqm per p.p
d. 1.75 sqm per p.p
38. Standards for firefighting services prescribe that municipalities with 10,000 or more population but
below 50, 000 should provide at least one fire truck. Adjoining municipalities, however, are
allowed to share one fire truck provided that the distance is within presc ribed limits. In such cases
the maximum travel time between municipalities should be.
a. 10 minut es
b. 15 minut es
c. 20 minut es
d. 30 minut es
39. In the identification of needs and the planning of social welfare programs and services, the
planner is expected to.
a. Involve the clientele

b. Involve the national and local government
c. Involve the private sector
d. Involve all sectors mentioned above
40. The law that authorizes the establishment and promulgation of different levels of standards of
economic and socialized housing in urba n and rural areas provided under the Subdivision and
Condominium Buyers Protective Decree and the National Building Code is.
a. BP 220
b. RA 7279
c. PD 957
d. PD 1216
P a g e |l REVIEWER FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING

41. What ratio bet ween saleable and non -saleable portions of the subdivision is required for projects
developed under BP 220 standards ?
a. No fix ed ratio
b. 70% saleable and 30% non-saleable
c. 40% saleable and 60% non-saleable
d. Minimum of 50% open space
42. A single detached dwelling unit is defined as a house.
a. Good for one household

b. Intended for ownership
c. Completely surrounded by yards
d. With one or more of its sides abutting the property line
43. A study which includes all the units in the population called
a. Wholistic study
b. Phenomenological study
c. Survey
d. Cens us
44. The difference between a census and a survey is that
a. Cens us makes use of questionnaires while surveys make use of interviews for data gat hering
b. Cens us involves complete enumeration while survey involves sampling
c. Cens us is done only every 10 years while survey can be done anytime
d. Only the NSO can conduct a census but anybody can conduct a survey
45. This type of plan shows the allocation of land into broad functional classes e.g., development
areas, conservation/ preservation areas agricultural area and forest areas.
a. Structure plan
b. General Land Use Plan
c. Development Plan
d. Comprehensive Plan
46. Agricultural land in its generic sense is synonymous with what basic land classification?
a. Timberland
b. Unclassified public forest
c. Alienable and dispos able
d. Ancestral domain
e. Critical watershed
47. Which of the following is not a factor in determining the suitability of land for an industrial estate?
a. Load-bearing capacity
b. Soil fertility
c. Drainage
d. Slope
e. Location
48. The 1987 constitution seeks to classify all lands in the public domain int o four categories. Name
the one that is not among the four.
a. Agricultural land
b. Mineral land
c. National park
d. Ancestral domain
e. Forest land
49. Which of the maps listed below is not a thematic map?
a. Base map
b. Land use map
c. Slope map
d. Geologic map
e. Physical constraints map
50. What class of road is not part of a hierarchy?
a. Arterial
b. Collector
c. Distributor
d. Gravel surfaced
e. Local
51. Which land use type is normally not classified as urban?
a. Institutional
b. Residential
c. Mining and quarrying
d. Industrial
e. Commercial
52. The main regulat ory tool for implementing land use plans in the Philippin es is.
a. Capit al investment programs

b. Special assessment s
c. Expropriation
d. Zoning
53. The agency that implements the laws, rules and regulations that support policies of Government
with regard to optimizing the use as a resourc e is.
a. NEDA
b. DAR
c. HLURB
d. DPWH
54. The agency responsible for the housing program is.
a. NHA
b. HUDCC
c. HLURB
d. MMDA
55. The minimum lot area under PD 957 is.
a. 100 sqm.
b. 72 sqm
P a g e |n REVIEWER FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING

c. 150 sqm
d. 120 sqm
56. The process of arranging activities and plans among different interest or planning groups for the
purpose of systematizing and facilitating operations is called.
a. Public hearing
b. Cons ultation
c. Coordination
d. Scoping
57. The process of obtaining technical advice or opinion which may not be allowed is called
a. Cons ultation
b. Coordination
c. Public hearing
d. Citizen participation
58. This document is a series of written statements accompanied by maps, illustrations and diagrams
which describes what the community wants to become and how it wants to develop. It is
essentially composed of community goals, objectives, policies, programs and a physical
development plan which translates the various sectoral plans.
a. Land Use Plan

b. Action Plan
c. Strategic Plan
d. Development Plan
59. This is the process of appraising the feasibility, credibility and probable impacts or consequences
of alternative schemes of development or specific environmental conditions.
a. Environmental impact assessment

b. E valuation
c. Diagnostic survey
d. Feasibility study
60. One of these plans is not required of AFMA.
a. Regional Agro-Industrial Development Plan

b. The SAFDZ Integrated Development Plan
c. The Agric ultural and Fishery Modernization Plan
61. It is the process of predicting the likely environmental consequences of implementing a project or
undertaking and designing appropriate preventive, mitigating and enhancement measures.
a. Scoping
b. Initial environmental examination
c. Environmental impact assessment
d. Environmental risk assessment
62. In transportation planning, the collection of data is undert aken through different types of surveys.
The manual counting and classifying, by type of vehicle and direction of travel, all passing each
station during specified periods, supplemented by aut omatic traffic recorder counts extending
over longer periods is called.
a. Travel time surveys

b. Roadside survey
c. Network inventories
d. Zoning
63. This is the one of the methods of trip generation modeling, which is concerned with finding the
best functional relations hip bet ween a dependent variable and one or more independent
variables. This relations hip is usually assumed to be linear.
a. Analysis of variance
b. Multiple regression
c. Category analysis
d. Situational analysis
64. This is a method of trip assignment which takes into account congestion on the transportation
system. It is the process of det ermining a pattern of traffic flow for a known set of interzonal
movements so that the relationship bet ween journeys times flow on every link in the network
should be in accordance with that specified for the link.
a. Diversion curves
b. All-or-not hing assignment
c. Capacity restraint
65. These are lands that are capable of sustaining the economic productivity levels of crops/land use
overtime in a given climatic region without adversely affecting the immediate and adjoining
environment.
a. Agricultural lands
b. Prime agricultural lands
c. Environmentally critical areas
d. Agro-industrial zones
P a g e |p REVIEWER FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING

SET B ANSW ER KEY:
1. c. Board of Environment al Planning

2. d. at least 75% of the entire membership and 75% of the capitalization is owned by registered
environmental planners
3. c. Family planning
4. b. births, deaths, and migration
5. c. 500 persons per square kilometer
6. d. all of the above
7. b. the number of males divided by the number of females, times 100
8. true
9. d. the means of substance grew only at an arithmetic rate whereas the population tended to grow
at a geometric rate.
10. a. a static picture because it freezes the continuous action of mortality, fertility, and migration at a
particular moment in time.
11. b. in-migration
12. b. it contains the country’s primary central business district
13. a. belong to ICCs/IPPs comprising lands, inlands, waters, coastal areas and nat ural resources
herein.
14. b. RA 7586
15. b. on – farm production enhancement technologies
16. d. Strategic Agriculture and Fishery Development Zone
17. c. the cost of transporting raw materials to the factory and finished goods to the market
18. c. the distribution of the industry in the region doe not deviate much from the distribution of other
industries.
19. a. a few large cities, some- medium sized cities, and many small settlements
20. b. existing and expected land values
21. a. net present value
22. a. 15 minutes by public transport
23. a. cost benefits analysis
st
24. a. 15% of total arable lands in chart ered cities and 1 class municipalities
25. a. Bataan IE
26. a. Puerto Ric o
27. a. countryside agro-industrial development
28. a. growth pole
29. b. Garden Cities of Tomorrow
30. d. Clarence Perry
31. b. Cities in E volution
32. a. a conceptual system focusing on urban form
33. c. accessibility concepts and urban structure
34. a. Internal Revenue Allocations
35. d. incidence of disease
36. d. interpolation coefficient
37. b. 1.40 sqm per p.p
38. d. 30 minutes
39. d. involve all sectors mentioned abo ve
40. a. BP 220
41. a. no fixed ratio
42. c. completely surrounded by yards
43. d. census
44. b. census involves complete enumeration while survey involves sampling
45. b. General Land Use Plan
46. c. alienable and disposable
47. b. soil fertility
48. d. ancestral domain
49. a. base map
50. d. gravel surfaced
51. c. mining and quarrying
52. d. zoning
53. c. HLURB
54. b. HUDCC
55. b. 72 sq m
56. c. coordination
57. a. consultation
58. a. Land USE Plan
59. a. environmental impact assessment
60. d. none of the above
61. c. Environmental impact assessment
62. b. roadside survey
63. b. multiple regression
64. c. capacity restraint
65. b. prime agricultural lands
P a g e |r REVIEWER FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING

PRACTICE QUESTIONS - SET C
Subject: Physi cal Planning Aspects
Direction: In the answer sheet provided, blacken the space (O) corre sponding to the answer for
each question.
1. The improper us e of the land in a manner that destroys its good quality and potential refers to:
a. Land misuse
b. Land abuse
c. Land non-use
d. Disuse
2. The relative ability of a unit of land resource to produce a surplus of returns/satisfactions above
the cost of utilization is termed:
a. Carrying capacity
b. Land capability
c. Land use capacity
d. Land suitability
3. The land use plan category with the highest bid is the __________________ area:
a. Commercial
b. Residential
c. Industrial
d. Institutional
4. An example of a reversible type of land use is:

a. Lands used for transportation infrastructure
b. Coastal and inland wetlands
c. River dams and reservoirs
d. Agricultural croplands
5. The primary factor/s in the location of cities during the Bronz e Age along the Indus Valley is/are:
a. Trans port
b. Agriculture
c. Defense
e. All of the above
6. A basic characteristic of land that figures as an important factor in “Malthus ” formulation of his
Dismal Theorem refers to:
a. Capacity for ownership
b. Immobility
c. Finiteness
d. Indestructibility
7. Land use det erminants that involve thee observance of economy, convenience, health and
safety, amenity or overall community livability refers to:
a. Socially rooted values
b. Public interest values
c. Profit -making values
d. Ecological values
8. In the eco-engineering analysis of land use, the phase which involves the “thinking” process or
the application of planning standards and principles is the:
a. Descriptive phase
b. Development phase
c. Implementing phase
d. Appraisal phase
9. When the land is currently cultivated and has slopes above 50 percent, the proposed use as
stipulated in P.D. 705 and R.A 7586 is:
a. Protection forest
b. Agriculture
c. Production forest
d. Grazing
10. A land that is suitable for production forest has the following slope, soil and elevation
characteristics:
a. <18% slope,> 50 cm. soil depth, > 500 meter el evation
b. <18% slope,< 50 cm. soil, 1000 meter elevation
c. 18-50% slope, < 50 cm. soil depth, > 500-1000 meter elevation
d. > 50% slope, < 50 cm. soil depth, > 1000 meter elevation
11. The worth that “declines” or moves with time has to be computed when directions a re called the:
a. Geographic
b. Magnetic
c. True nort h
d. Grid north
12. The scale that is not affected in terms of size whenever a map is subjected to expansion or
reduction by photo copying or “Xeroxing” is the:
a. Statement
b. Fractional scale
c. Linear scale
d. Verbal scale
13. The map produc ed by either the eco-engineering analysis or sieve analysis that involves the
overlay technique is the:
a. Analytical map
b. Thematic map
c. Base map
d. General map
14. The proper ranking of the following physical factors terms of significance to agricultural land use
planning is:
a. 1-elevation, 2-slope, 3-soil

b. 1-slope, 2-elevation, 3-soil
c. 1-soil, 2-slope, 3-elevation
d. 1-slope, 2-soil, 3-elevation
15. The advantage of aerial photography over satellite remote sending is the former’s characteristic
of:
a. Lower operational cost
b. Less time spent in processing
c. Higher resolution
d. Greater area coverage
P a g e |t REVIEWER FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING

16. The spectral region in the electro-magnetic spectrum with wavelengths raging from 0-380 to
0.780 and whose applicability using sensor lies in relict features of the earth’s surface refers to:
a. Near infrared rays
b. Ultraviolet rays
c. Visible/light rays
d. Radar waves
17. In sieve mapping and eco-engineering analysis, the most useful and appropriate Geographic
Information System capability employed is called the:
a. Geographic query and analysis
b. Overlay analysis
c. Proximity analysis
d. Visualization
18. A GIS-related technology that gathers measurements and features of the earth’s surface but
cannot be called true GIS due to its lack of strong data management and analytical capabilities
refers to:
a. Remote Sensing and Global Positioning System (GPS)
b. Database Management System (DBMS)
c. Computer-Assisted Drawing (CAD)
d. Desktop Mapping
19. The American Landsite and French SPOT satellites use a sensor system referred to in the
literature as:
a. Electro-Optical scanners
b. Photographic cameras
c. Microwave/ RADA R sensor
d. Optical telescopes
20. The maps produced by either satellite sensing or aerial photography are always oriented to the:
a. Grid north
b. Magnetic north
c. Viscount Melville Sound center
d. Geographic north
21. The most common drainage pattern in the world is the:

a. Trellis b. dendritic c. radial d. braided pattern
22. The soil moisture that occupies the zone of saturation below the ground is the:
a. Gravitational b. capillary c. hygroscopic, water
23. The slope range that is prescribe as production land use is:
a. 0-8% b. above 50% c. 18-50% d. 0-8%
24. The elevation reserved for protection land use is:

a. Above 500 b. above 100 c. above 2,000 d. above 1,000 meters
25. Under the 1938 Bureau of Soils evolutionary soil classification system, the classification level
depicted are:
a. Soil order b. soil type c. soil great group d. soil series
26. A type of rock trans formed by heat and pressure is the:

a. Metamorphic b. igneous c. sedimentary d. conglomerate rock
27. A diastrophic process marked by slippage of rocks along the plane of break age is called:
a. Breaking b. faulting c. folding d. warping
28. A Philippine climatic type characterized by rainfall evenly distributed throughout the years refers
to:
a. Type III b. Type II c. Type IV d. Type I
29. The monsoon that starts as the southeast trades and is an important climatic control of the type I
climatic is the:
a. Nort heast b. southeast c. northwest d. southwest monsoon
30. The Philippine forest type that is adapted growing in steep slopes and in plac es with a distinct wet
and dry season is the:
a. Pine /saleng b dipterocarp/lauan c. molave/molawin d. mangrove
31. Urbanization began around 4,000 B.C. in the area known as the:
a. Fertile Crescent b. Mediterranean c. Babylon d. Asia
32. The primary factor/s in the location of cities during the Bronz e Age along the Indus Valley is/are:
a. Trans port b. Agriculture c. Defense d. None of three e. All
33. They understood the import ance of transportation and thus emerged as the first regional plann ers
of the world.
a. Greeks b. Romans c. Sumerians d. Egyptians
34. It was during this period that the concept of urban design was established:
a. Renaissance b. Bronze Age c. Medieval Period d. Atomic Age
35. He solidified the concept of new towns as an urban planning instrument and proposed the
Garden City as a solution to urban planning problems:
a. Malthus b. Ebenezer Howard c. Nicodemus d. Adam Smith
36. He theorized that physical planning could not improve urban living conditions unless it was
integrated with social and economic planning in a context of environmental concerns:
a. William Penn B. Patrick Geddes C. Pierre L’Enfant d. None of the three
37. The architect planner who designed Luneta, Tagaytay and Baguio:
a. Burnham b. Concio c. Faithful d. None of the above
38. Rectangular streets are examples of the:

a. Grid iron pattern b. Axial c. Radial d. Ribbon-type
39. What were the most factors in designing settlement patterns during the Spanish period in the
Philippines?
a. Plaza b. Economy c. Transport ation d. Religion
planning, wrote this famous book, first published in 1898:
a. Garden Cities
b. Garden Cities of Tomorrow (1902)
d. Tomorrow (1898)
P a g e |v REVIEWER FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING

41. In the United States, a parallel idea on influencing guided urbanization focused in the
neighborhood unit. This American planner espoused the neighbor unit, not only as a planning
unit, but as a deliberate piece of social engineering:
a. Desmond Heap
b. Stuard Chopin
c. Clarence Stein
d. Clarence Perry
42. Patrick Geddes, a Scot biologist who is acknowledge as the father of regional planning set forth
his ideas in his master piec e entitled:
a. Cities and Regions
b. Cities in E volution
d. Revolution in Cities
43. Kevin Ly nch stresses:

a. A conceptual system focusing on urban form
structure)
44. Cert ain environment al factors affect population distribution at a given point in time. They are:
a. Climate
b. Location of water, soil, energy and mineral resources
c. Trans port relationships
d. All of the above
45. In transportation planning, the collection of data is undert aken through different types of surveys.
The manual counting and classifying, by type of vehicle and direction of travel, all passing each
station during specified periods, supplemented by aut omatic traffic recorder counts extending
over longer periods is called:
a. Travel time surveys
b. Roadside survey
c. Networking inventors
d. Zoning
46. This is one of the methods of trip generation modeling, which is concerned with finding the best
functional relationship is usually assumed to be linear:
a. Analysis of variance
b. Multiple regression
c. Category analysis
d. Situational analysis
47. This is a method of trip assignment takes into account congestion on the transportation system. It
is the process of determining a pattern of traffic flow for a known set of interzonal movements so
that the relationship between journey time and flow on every link in the network should be in
accordance with that specified for the link:
a. Diversion curves
b. All-or-not hing assignment
c. Capacity restraint
48. This is the process of appraising the feasibility, credibility and probable impacts or consequences
of alternative schemes of development or specific environmental conditions:
a. Environmental impact assessment
b. E valuation
c. Diagnostic
d. Feasibility study
49. It is the process of predicting the likely environmental consequences of implementing a project or
undertaking and designing appropriate preventive, mitigating and enhancement measures:
a. Scoping
b. Initial environmental ex amination
c. Environmental Impact assessment
d. Environmental risk assessment
50. A hierarchy of settlements is usually characterized by the presence of:

a. A few large cities, some medium-sized cities, and many small settlements
b. Only medium-sized and small settlements
c. Equally-sized large cities in every region
d. Only one large city and many small settlements
51. Land use changes in large and developed cities is largely a function of:
a. Government large use and zoning policies
b. Existing and expected land values
c. Demand for housing
d. Foreign investment
52. This type of plan show the alloc ation of lan d into broad functional classes, e.g., development
areas, conversation/ preservation areas, agricultural are and forest areas:
a. Structure plan
b. General land use plan
c. Development plan
d. Comprehensive plan
53. Agricultural land in its generic sense is synonymous wit h what basic land classification?
a. Timberland
b. Unclassified public forest
c. Alienable and dispos able
d. Ancestral domain
e. Critical watershed

a. Institutional
b. Residential
d. Industrial
e. Commercial
55. These are lands that are capable of sustaining the economic productivity levels of crops/land use
over time in a given climatic region without adversely affecting the immediate and adjoining
environment:
a. Agricultural lands
b. Prime agricultural lands
c. Environmentally critical areas
d. Agro-industrial zones
P a g e |x REVIEWER FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING

56. Which of the maps listed below is not a thematic map?
a. Base map
b. Land use map
c. Slope map
d. Geologic map
e. Physical constraint map
57. The standard distance of a commercial activity from an education center should be:
a. 15 minut es by public transport
b. 15 minutes by private transport
c. 30 minut es minimum travel time by public transport
d. 60 minut es travel time by public transport
58. Planning standards for school facilities include minimum standards for spac e measured in terms
of square meters per pupil (p.p) for academic classrooms in the elementary level, the minimum
standard is:
a. 1.20 sqm per p.p
b. 1.40 sqm per p.p
c. 1.50 sqm per p.p
d. 1.75 sqm per p.p
59. Standards for firefighting services prescribe that municipalities with 10,000 or more population but
below 50, 000 should provide at least one fire truck. Adjoining municipalities, however, are
allowed to share one fire truck provided that the distance is within prescribed limits. In such
cases, the maximum travel time between municipalities should be:
a. 10 minut es
b. 15 minut es
c. 20 minut es
d. 30 minut es
60. What class of road is not part of a hierarchy?

a. Arterial
b. Collector
c. Distributor
d. Gravel surfaced
e. Local
SET C ANSW ER KEY:
1. b. Land abus e
2. c. Land use capacity
3. a. commercial
4. d. agriculture
5. c all of the above
6. c. finiteness
7. d. ecological values
8. d. appraisal values
9. a. protection forest
10. c. 18-50%, > 50 cm. soil depth, > 500 – 1000 meter elevation
11. c. true north
12. c. linear scale
13. a. analytical map
14. c. l – soil, 2 slope, 3-elevation
15. c. higher resolution
16. c. visible / light rays
17. b. overlay analysis
18. a. Remot e Sensing and Global Positioning System (GPS)
19. a. Electro-Optical scanners
20. d. Geographic north
21. b. dendritic
22. d. groundwat er
23. a. 0 – 18%
24. d. above 1,000 meters
25. d. soil series
26. b. igneous
27. b. faulting
28. c. Type IV
29. d. southwest monsoon
30. a. pine/saleng
31. a. fertile crescent
32. e. all
33. b. Romans
34. a. renaissance
35. b. Ebenezer Howard
36. b. Patrick Geddes
P a g e |z REVIEWER FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING

37. a. Burnham
38. a. Grid iron pattern
39. a. Plaza
40. d. Tomorrow (1898)
41. d. Clarence Perry
42. b. Cities in E volution (1915)
43. a. a conceptual system focusing on urban form
44. d. all of the above
45. b. roadside survey
46. b. multiple regression
47. c. Capacity restraint
48. a. environmental impact assessment
49. c. Environmental impact assessment
50. a. a few large cities, some medium -sized cities, and many small settlements
51. b. existing and expected land values
52. b. General Land Use Plan
53. c. alienable and disposable
55. b. prime agricultural land
56. a. base map
57. a. 15 minutes
58. a. 1.20 sqm per p.p
59. a. 10 minutes
60. d. gravel surfaced
PRACTICE QUESTIONS – SET D
1. The enforcement PD 1308 as well as the monitoring and inspection of educational institutions
offering courses in environment al planning is the responsibility of the:
a. Commission on Higher Education
b. Philippine Institute of Environmental Planners
c. Board of Environmental Planning
d. School of Urban and Regional Planning
2. Demography denotes the study of human population through statistical methods. This involves
primarily the measurement of their size and increase of the numbers of people. The constituents
of change in these numbers are:
a. Births and deaths
b. Births, deaths and migration
c. Birth, adaptation, marriages, divorce, legal separation and annulment
d. Birth, citizenship, duration of marriage and ethnic origin
3. The law that provides for the establishment and management of National Integrated Protected
Areas System is
a. RA 8371 – IFRA
b. RA 7586 – NIPAS
c. RA 7279 – UDHA
4. The factors for analyzing traditional location theory are

a. the costs of marketing and advertising
b. labor wages
c. the costs of transporting raw materials to the factory and finished goods to the market
d. all of the above
5. A hierarchy of human settlements is usually characterized by the presence of

a. a few large cities, some medium-sized cities, and many small settlements
b. only medium-sized and small settlements
c. equally –sized large cities in every region
d. only one large city and many small settlements
6. This strategy aims to promote greater complementary between agriculture and industry and
between urban and rural sectors:
a. Countryside agro-industrial development
P a g e | bb REVIEWER FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING

b. National council for integrated area development
c. Nationwide agro-industrial area development
planning, wrote those famous books, first published in 1898.
a. Garden Cities
b. Garden Cities of Tomorrow
d. Tomorrow
8. Patrick Geddes, a Scot biologist who is acknowledge as t he father of regional s et forth his ideas
in his masterpiec e entitled:
a. Cities and Regions
b. Cities and E volution
d. Revolution in Cities
9. What ratio between saleable and non -saleable portions of the subdivision is required for projects
developed under BP 220 standards:
a. No fix ed ratio
b. 70% saleable and 30% non-saleable
c. 40% saleable and 60% non-saleable
d. Minimum of 50% open space

a. Institutional
b. Residential
d. Industrial
e. Commercial
SET D ANSW ER KEY:
1. c. Board of Environment al Planning

2. b. births, deaths and migration
3. b. RA 7586 – NIPAS
4. c. the costs of transporting raw materials to the factory and finished goods to the market
5. a. a few large cities, some medium -sized cities, and many small settlements
6. a. countryside agro-industrial development
7. b. Garden Cities of Tomorrow (1902)
8. b. Cities in E volution
9. a. no fixed ratio
P a g e | dd REVIEWER FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING

PRACTICE QUESTIONS – SET E
Sample Questions given B y: Prof. Meliton B. Juanic o: on Fundamentals of Urban and Regional Planning
and History of Urban and Regional Planning.
1. A type of planning that is also known as regulatory planning and is concerned with spatio -sectoral
assignments and the coordination and resolution of conflicts.
a. Physical planning
b. Allocative planning
c. Indicative planning
d. Imperative planning
2. A planning approach that proposes a piecemeal strategy in dealing with societ al change,
contending that planning is only able to adopt a series of limited “muddling through” actions:
a. Comprehensive planning
b. Reduced planning
c. Survey0analysis-plan approach
d. Disjoint incrementalism
3. The P hilippine plaz a complex planning approach was designed t o implement the following policy
of Spain:
a. Polo system
b. Regalian Doctrine
c. Reduccion policy
d. Encomienda system
th
4. An urban ecology process that occurred as early as the late 19 century in England and was
attribute among others to the railway system, a mobile middle class and the tendency to establish
housing estates/model dwellings was:
a. Suburbanization
b. Urbanization
c. Gentrification
d. Leapfrogging
5. Ebeanezer Howard was associate with a town planning movement marked by the t hree magnets
of town, country, and town-country and was called:
a. Linear City Movement
b. Sanitary Reform Movement
c. City Beautiful Movement
d. Garden City Movement
6. He is known for his classic but rigid survey-analysis-plan approach.

a. Patrick Abercombie
b. Don A rturo Soria y Mata
c. Patrick Geddes
d. Le Corbusier
7. A seminal type of urban morphology that was characterized as liberal and did not follow a class
hierarchy or spatial ordering:
a. Greek City
b. Roman City
c. Medieval City
d. Renaissance City
8. The first Garden City in England that was built with privat e capital under the direction of Ebenezer
Howard was:
a. Welwyn
b. La Ville Radieuse
c. Letchworth
d. Chandigarh
9. The first “new town” that was also designed on “neighborhood unit” principles was:
a. Stevenage
b. Milton Keynes
c. London
d. Cumbernauld
10. Land use zoning is a planning practice attribute to the _____________ who are usually known to
be spatially precise:
a. Dutch
b. Germans
c. Scandinavians
d. Frenc h
11. Among the roles attribute to a planner is that he:

a. Is a liassez-faine observer of human and physical events
b. Imposes his rational views on the stakeholders
c. Provokes contention among potentially differing parties
12. Third World cities are characterized by the following dual spatio-demographic features:
a. Inter connected settlement network and rank-size rule
b. Interconnected settlement network and primate city phenomenon
c. Dendritic settlement pattern and primate city phenomenon
d. Dendritic settlement pattern and rank-size rule
13. In growth pole theory, a proc ess that is not part of the theoretical assumptions of the spontaneous
“trickling down” or “spread” effects propounded by Albert Hirschman and Gunnar Myrdal,
respectively, is:
a. Desirable rural-urban labor/factor movement resulting in wage equilibrium
b. Creating demand in urban areas for rural products with high income elasticities of demand
c. Occurrence of discoveries of scale in urban centers
d. Government intervention through injection of investments into rural areas
14. The theoretical formulation that explains particularly the distribution market or t ertiary centers
rather than agricultural or industrial centers is attributed to:
a. August Losch
b. Alfred Weber
c. Walter Christaller
d. Water Isard
15. The theoretician who first extended t he original growt h pole t heory to include more
comprehensively the spatial dimension was:
a. F. Perroux
b. J. Boudeville
c. N. M. Hansen
d. T. HE rmans en
P a g e | ff REVIEWER FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING

16. The establishment of provincial and municipal governments in the Philippines from existing
pueblos that constituted a seminal move in local planning development came in 1630 with the
abolition or repeal of the:
a. encomienda system
b. Laws of the Indies
c. Bajo a las campanas policy
d. Maura Law
17. The practice of regional delineation as part of the development of planning in the Philippines
came with the formulation in 1972 by President Marcos of t he:
a. Integrated Reorganization Plan
b. National Physical Framework Plan
c. National Multi-Y ear Human Settlements Plan
d. Physical Perspective Plan
18. Among t he variants of the supra -regional development strategy of redistribution with growth
(RwG), the model of Albert Waterston that is signific ant in its deliberat e and holistic incorporation
of the spatial dimension is referred to as:
a. Redirecting Investments
b. Integrated Rural Development (IRD)
c. Countryside Agro-Industrial Development Strategy (CA IDS )
d. Agriculture First Development
19. The regional planning theory/strategy that prescribes injecting development impulses directly to
the rural growth centers but recommends continuous urban -rural link age to that of:
a. Johnson’s rural market center strategy
b. The Philippine governments’ Integrated Area Development (IA D) strategy
c. Rondinelli’s Urban Functions in Development (UFRD)
d. The traditional growth cent er strategy
20. Among the dec entralized territorial integration strategies, the seminal one that posits the
development of small urban centers in the rural landscape and the operation of “selective closure”
refers to:
a. Friedmann’s agropolitan strategy
b. Ranc h and Redder’s autocentric development strategy
c. Misra’s Settlement Complex Planning (SCP ) strategy
d. Roxa’s community-centered ec onomic model
21. The Autonomous Region for Muslims Mindanao suffers mainly from the absence of at least two
feature(s) of a good or viable regional delineation set-up, which are:
a. spatial contiguity and varied natural features
b. presence of large on-going projects and network of urban centers
c. developed transportation net work and varied et hno -linguistic groupings
d. spatial contiguity and a large area/ resource base
SET E ANSWER KEY:
1. b. Allocative planning
2. d. disjointed incrementalism
3. c. reduccion policy
4. a. suburbaniz ation
5. d. Garden City Movement
6. c. Patrick Geddes
7. a. Greek City
8. c. Letchworth
9. a. Stevenage
10. b. Germans
11. c. provok es contention among potentially differing parties
12. c. dendritic settlement pattern and primate city phenomenon
13. d. government intervention through injection of investments into rural areas
14. c. Walter Christaller
15. b. J. Boudeville
16. a. Encomienda system
17. a. Integrated Reorganization Plan
18. b. Integrated Rural Development (IRD)
19. c. Rondinelli’s Urban Functions in Development (UFRD)
20. a. Friedmann’s agropolit an strategy
21. d. spatial contiguity and a large area/resource base
P a g e | hh REVIEWER FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING

PRACTICE QUESTIONS – SET F
1. Republic Act 9003, otherwise known as the national Ecological S olid Waste Management
Program seeks to:
a. promote public healt h and environment protection
b. encourage greater private sector participation while ret aining the primary enforcement and
responsibility with the LGU’s
c. mandates all LGUs to divert at least 25% of all solid wastes from disposal facilities through
reuse, recycling, composting and other resource recovery activities
d. a and c only
e. all of the above
2. Under RA9003,LGUs are required t o divert at least 25% of their sold wastes from existing
disposal facilities within a period of:
a. 10 years
b. 2 years
c. 5 years
d. One year
from the affectivity of the law.
3. At the National level, RA 9003 mandates the creation of a National Solid Waste Management
Commission under the office of the:
a. President
b. DENR
c. DILG
d. NEDA
4. The National Solid Waste Management Framework shall be formulated and shall include the
following:
a. Analysis and evaluation of the current state, trends, projections of solid waste
management on the national, provincial and municipal levels
b. Identification of critical solid waste facilities
c. Characteristics and conditions of collection, storage, processing disposal, operati ng
methods, techniques and practices, location of facilities where such operating methods,
techniques and practices are conducted, taking into account the nature of the waste
d. Proposed sites for sanitary landfill
e. All of the above
f. A to C only
5. It refers to the discipline associated with the control of generation, storage, collection, transfer
and transport, processing, and disposal of solid wastes in a manner that is in accord with the best
principles of public health, economics, engineering, conservation, aesthetics and other
environmental considerations and that is also responsive to public attitudes.
a. Environmental Impact Assessment
b. Development Planning
c. Waste segregation
d. Solid Waste Management
6. The Local Government Solid Waste management Plan shall include, but not limited, to the
following components:
a. City or municipal profile
b. Waste characterization
c. Collection and trans fer
d. Source reduction
e. All of the above
f. B to D only
7. Article 2, Sec.21 of R.A 9003 provides for the mandatory segregation of solid wastes. Spec ifically,
the LGUs shall promulgate regulations, requiring the owner or person in charge of premises
containing:
a. Five residential units
b. Six residential units
c. Six or more residential units
d. At least ten residential units
To provide for the residents a design ated area and containers in which to accumulate
source separated recyclable materials to be collected by the municipal or private center.
8. The following are the minimum criteria for the sitting of sanitary landfills:
a. The site selected must be consistent with the overall land use plan of the LGU
b. The site must be accessible from major roadways or thoroughfares
c. The site should have an adequate quantity of earth cover material that is easily handled
and compacted
d. The site should be large enough to accommodate the community’s waste for a period of
ten (10) y ears during which people must internalize the value of environmentally sound
and sustainable solid waste disposal
e. All of the above
f. All except D
9. Guidelines for identification of common solid waste management problems and are appropriate
for clustered solid waste management services shall be based on the following:
a. Preference of political leaders
b. Size and location of areas which should be included
c. Volume of waste which would be generated
d. A vailable means of coordinating local government planning between and among the
LGUs and for integration of such with the national plan possible life span of the disposal
facilities
e. A to E
f. B to E
10. The LGU shall impose fees in amounts sufficient to the costs preparing, adopting, a nd
implementing a solid waste management pan. Such fees shall be based on the following
minimum factors:
a. Types of solid waste
b. Amount/ volume of solid waste
c. Distance of trans fer station to the waste management facility
d. Capacity to pay
e. A,B,C,D
f. A to C
P a g e | jj REVIEWER FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING

SET F ANSWER KEY:
1. e. all of the above

2. c. 5 years
3. a. President
4. e. All of the above
5. d. Solid waste management
6. e. all of the above
7. c. six or more residential units
8. f. All except d
9. f. b to e
10. f. a to c
P a g e | ll REVIEWER FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING

EnP Draft Reviewer 2012

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

EnP Draft Reviewer 2012

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Module 1. INTRODUCTION TO P LANNING ......................................................................................

REVIEWER FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING PAGE | i

REVIEWER FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING PAGE | 1

1791 – L’Enfant’s Plan for Washington

The plan was intended as:

 The model for American City Planning

 A symbol of governmental power

REVIEWER FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING PAGE | 3

1853-1870 – Baron Haussmann and the

 Economic: Promote industrialization by enabling goods

 Aesthetic: Impose a measure of unifying order and

 Military: Eliminate the threats of prolet ariats rising

 Sanitary: Improve the state of health

Haussmann's Renovation of Paris, or the Haussmann Plan,

The project encompassed all as pects of urban planning, both in

P a g e |4 REVIEWER FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING

REVIEWER FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING PAGE | 5

 Freedom of the individual

 Air, sun and natural light in all dwellings

 Equalitarian desire for quality services in all city districts

 Mobility and ease of communication

P a g e |6 REVIEWER FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING

1898 – Ebenezer Howard and his Garden City Concept

 Raise health and comfort of all true workers of whatever class

 Find work at higher purc hasing power

 Secure healthi er surroundings and more regular employment

 Secure a new and better employment for professionals

The only publication he wrote in his

It proposed the creation of

REVIEWER FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING PAGE | 7

1891 – Daniel Burnham plans the 1893 World’s Columbian Exposition

Print of an aerial view of the exposition

The exposition covered more than 600 acres

Most of the buildings were based on classical

P a g e |8 REVIEWER FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING

1909 – Daniel Burnham’s Plan of Chicago

 Rationalize development for the fut ure

 Proposed the moral up-building and physical beautification of Chicago

 Better living conditions

 Reclaiming the lakefront for the public

 Increase the park areas and public playgrounds

REVIEWER FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING PAGE | 9

P a g e | 10 REVIEWER FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING

1822-1903 – Frederick Law Olmsted Sr.

 1893 World Exposition in Chicago

 Mostly famous for the design of:

 Cent ral Park, NY

 Buffalo, NY park system

1870-1957 – Frederick Law Olmsted Jr.

 1901 - Member of the McMillan Commission

 1910s-1920s - Founder of the American City Planning Institute

REVIEWER FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING PAGE | 11

Many features of his suburban plans have had enduring influence:

 Concept of neighborhood-cent ered development

 Differentiation of streets by function

 Importance of common open recreation space

 Need for continuing maintenance and aesthetic oversight

 Plan simply, but comprehensively

 Provide ample sites in the right places for community use

 Cars must be parked and stored

 Bring private and public land int o relationship

 Arrange for the occupancy of houses

P a g e | 12 REVIEWER FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING